Page 1 Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. In particular, be sure to read "1.1.1 For Your Safety (Page 14)" before using this product. KX-NS500: PFMPR Software File Version 004.20000 or later Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at: http://panasonic.net/pcc/support/pbx/...
Page 2 Introduction About this Programming Manual The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using Web Maintenance Console. The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections: Section 1, Overview Provides an overview of programming the PBX.
Page 3 • Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas, or for some PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. • Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice.
Page 4: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Overview ....................13 Introduction ........................14 1.1.1 For Your Safety ......................14 1.1.2 Introduction ........................16 1.1.3 Entering Characters .......................17 PC Programming ......................21 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console ................21 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode ................25 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode ..........30 2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console .........31 Introduction ........................32...
Page 5 Table of Contents Tool—Import ........................84 Tool—Export ........................89 Tool—Screen Customise ....................90 Tool—UM Data Backup ....................91 6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup ..............92 6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup ..............93 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore ....................94 6.11 Tool—UM Backup History ....................96 6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS .......................97 6.13 Tool—Contact information .....................98 6.14...
Page 6 Table of Contents 7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis ...............143 7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email .................144 Utility—Command ......................145 7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command ................145 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation ............146 7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording ..............148 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting ........148 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting .........149 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List ........150 7.10.4...
Page 7 Table of Contents 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT .....279 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT ....282 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT ..291 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT ...293 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPCS ....301 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS ....303 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-UTEXT ...308 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT ....310...
Page 8 Table of Contents 10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of Service ..........443 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings ......443 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block .....457 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block ....458 10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns ...........459 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO ....459 10.8.2...
Page 9 Table of Contents 11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List ..........................548 11.12 PBX Configuration—[3-12] Group—VM(DTMF) Group ..........551 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings ....551 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings ....555 11.12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List ..........................556 12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension .............557 12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension ...........558 12.1.1...
Page 10 Table of Contents 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message ..........676 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant ..............677 15 PBX Configuration—[7] TRS ...............679 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code ............680 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code ............681 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier ............682 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial ............683 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous ............684 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS ...............687...
Page 11 Table of Contents 21 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service ..........775 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service ..............776 22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service .....789 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group ....790 22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment ...792 23 UM Configuration—[4] Service Settings ..........793 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing ....794...
Page 12 Table of Contents PC Programming Manual...
Page 13: Overview
Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX. PC Programming Manual...
Page 14: Introduction
1.1.1 For Your Safety 1.1 Introduction 1.1.1 For Your Safety To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions. The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is operated or handled improperly.
Page 15 Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre. CAUTION •...
Page 16: Introduction
1.1.2 Introduction 1.1.2 Introduction These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system programming".
Page 17: Entering Characters
1.1.3 Entering Characters 1.1.3 Entering Characters The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX. Note For NE models, the tables differ depending on the Area Code selected in Easy Setup.
Page 18 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 2 (For NE model) PC Programming Manual...
Page 19 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 3 (For RU/UC model) PC Programming Manual...
Page 20 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 4 (For Greece) PC Programming Manual...
Page 21: Pc Programming
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console 1.2 PC Programming 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using Web Maintenance Console. Web Maintenance Console is accessed through a Web browser running on a networked PC. This section describes how to set up and access Web Maintenance Console.
Page 22 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console PC Specifications (for programming) The following are recommended specifications for PCs used for programming. For details about programming in Off-line mode, see 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode. Recommended Specification 3.2 GHz Intel Core™ 2 Duo processor or comparable CPU ®...
Page 23 – 223.0.0.1 – http://kx-ns500. Note • If entering "http://kx-ns500.", be sure to include the period at the end as shown. • If connecting using 223.0.0.1 takes a long time, configure a static IP address for the PC. Internet connection (TLS Connection): When the PC is accessing the PBX from a connection over the Internet, the use of TLS is strongly recommended.
Page 24 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console Connect the PC to the PBX. • Install the Remote card, connect the PBX to an analogue line, and access the PBX from a PC via a remote modem. • Connect the PBX to an ISDN line and access the PBX from a PC via an ISDN modem. For more details, refer to "5.2 PC Connection—Connection via RMT Card (KX-TDA0196)"...
Page 25: Pc Programming Using Off-Line Mode
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode PC Programming is performed by connecting to the PBX using Web Maintenance Console, which is also known as On-line mode. However, as certain programming requires installed cards to be set to out of service (OUS), or requires system settings to be changed, some programming cannot be performed while the PBX is in use.
Page 26 Easy Setup Wizard. For details, see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard. To convert a KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200’s or KX-TE’s system data file to KX-NS500 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 or KX-TE system data can be converted for use with the KX-NS500 by using the Database Converter. In the Programme Launcher, click Database Converter. The Database Converter screen will be displayed in your PC.
Page 27 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode Opening an Existing System Data File This operation will load a PBX settings system data file from your PC for programming in Off-line mode. The system data file can be a file created earlier using Off-line Web Maintenance Console, or a system data file downloaded from a PBX.
Page 28 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode VoIP Test Tool Click the VoIP Test Tool button to launch the VoIP Test Tool. This tool is identical to the VoIP Test Tool included with the Unified PC Maintenance Console for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs. IP Terminal Utility Click the IP Terminal button to launch the IP Terminal setup utility.
Page 29 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode Notice • If the PC running the Off-line Web Maintenance Console is shut down, the Web browser is closed, or the user logs out, any changes that have not been saved will be lost. Be sure to regularly save data while programming.
Page 30: Editing And Printing Terminal Labels In Off-Line Mode
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode Follow the procedure below to print key label sheets for use with your system’s extensions and DSS consoles. In On-line mode, export PBX system data to your PC, and then open the exported data in Off-line mode. In On-line mode, use the File Transfer PBX to PC utility to save your system’s data and settings to your PC.
Page 31: Introduction Of Web Maintenance Console
Section 2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using Web Maintenance Console to programme the PBX. PC Programming Manual...
Page 32: Introduction
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts 2.1 Introduction 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts User account levels Access to Web Maintenance Console requires a login name and password, which are assigned to accounts in the PBX. Also, access to Web Maintenance Console is controlled by different levels of authorisation. The Installer level is the highest authorisation level.
Page 33 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts Level Login Name Password Installer INSTALLER 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z, and 0-9 (case sensitive). For an initialised PBX that has not yet been set up, the default Installer level password is "1234". You will be prompted to choose a new password for the Installer level account when the Easy Setup Wizard is run (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Page 34: Access Levels
2.1.2 Access Levels 2.1.2 Access Levels Access to menu options within Web Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the level of the account and the current programming mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction). When a menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that menu option, for example: "This option is only available at Installer level."...
Page 35 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Off-line On-line ü ü Import®V-IPGW GW Settings Import®V-IPGW DN2IP ü ü ü ü Import®V-SIPGW Settings ü ü Import®V-SIPGW Provider ü ü ü ü Export®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü Export®Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü...
Page 36 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Off-line On-line File Transfer PBX to PC ü File View ü File Delete ü Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü Message File Transfer PBX to PC ü Error Log ü ü Syslog ü Web-MC Event Log ü...
Page 37 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Off-line On-line CS-Web Connection ü ü PC Programming Manual...
Page 38: Logging In To Web Maintenance Console
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console (see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console), the login window is displayed, and a login name and password must be entered. If this is the first time to log in to Web Maintenance Console, and the PBX is in its initialised, factory default state, you must log in using the Installer level account to begin the Easy Setup Wizard (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Page 39: Easy Setup Wizard
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard In the Easy Setup Wizard, you will configure the mandatory settings required for the PBX. When you log in to Web Maintenance Console for a PBX that is in its initialised, factory default state, the Easy Setup Wizard for that PBX will launch automatically.
Page 40: Card Status
2.1.5 Card Status 2.1.5 Card Status Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service (INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card status changes can be performed only in On-line mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction).
Page 41: Extension Number Setting
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button.
Page 42: Logout
2.2 Logout 2.2 Logout To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the button to end the programming session and return to the Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically saved from the temporary memory (DRAM) of the PBX to the System Memory. To logout Click the button.
Page 43: Frequently Asked Questions (Faq)
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics: Title Description Connection Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console. Maintenance Console Software Using the Maintenance Console software.
Page 44 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Card Status The status of a new card will not change to "INS". • With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or trunks exceed the maximum supported by the PBX? • Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-Install"...
Page 45 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by following the procedure shown Forced De-registration of 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station. I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still shows the old extension number.
Page 46 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Select 3-digits for Select default value of Numbering Plan in the Easy Setup Wizard. If you want to change to a 3-digit extension numbering plan after the PBX system is already running using a 4-digit extension numbering plan, follow the procedure below. There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main: Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit.
Page 47 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number? • Perform the following steps: Clear the Leading Number cell. Click Apply. No. of Additional Digits to "None". Click Apply. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
Page 48 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items. The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by: • A feature number • An extension •...
Page 49 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Setting Features How do I change the dialling mode of an analogue trunk? • From the 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port screen, change the Dialling Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF" or "Pulse", as required.
Page 50 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) How do I set up an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group to receive trunk calls directly? • Perform the following steps: On the 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings screen, enter the floating extension number you chose for the ICD group in the Floating Extension Number cell.
Page 51: Web Maintenance Console Home Screen
Section 3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen This section explains how to setup the main PBX and other connected PBXs from the Home Screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 52: Home Screen
3.1 Home Screen 3.1 Home Screen When you log in to Web Maintenance Console, the home screen is displayed. For information about connecting to Web Maintenance Console and logging in, see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console. The home screen of Web Maintenance Console is divided into several areas, as shown below: Logged in Account Level The logged in account level is displayed.
Page 53 3.1 Home Screen Button Description Clicking this button will display the Setup Screen tree view items. From the Setup Screen, you can: • Configure PBX hardware and virtual cards • Programme settings for extensions and call handling • Configure network settings and auxiliary PBX functions Setup Screen •...
Page 54 3.1 Home Screen Button Description Clicking this button will switch the tab display. There are two types of tab display, Tab Mode and Single Mode. When Tab Mode is used, items clicked in the tree are displayed in new tabs. When Single Mode is used, the current tab displays the clicked item.
Page 55 3.1 Home Screen Item Primary Functions Utility • Perform tests for PBX cards and network connections • Transfer files between the PBX and a connected PC • View reports, error logs, event logs, and programme update logs • Monitor and trace PBX communications and protocols •...
Page 56 3.1 Home Screen On a programming screen, click . The copy window will be displayed. Note icon may not be displayed for some programming screens. Select the copy source from the Copy From drop-down menu. In Copy To, select one or more paste destinations. Hold down the "Ctrl" key and click to select destinations one at a time, or hold down the "Shift"...
Page 57: Status
Section 4 Status This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Status menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 58: Status-Equipment Status
4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS 4.1 Status—Equipment Status 4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS Information is provided about the status of the UPS device and the connection to the PBX • UPS Connection Status Displays if the UPS system is connected or not connected. If a UPS system is connected, the information below will be displayed for the UPS system.
Page 59: Status-Equipment Status-Cs Information
4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information 4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS). This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode and requires that the target V-IPCS4 card be set to INS status. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description...
Page 60: Status-Equipment Status-Ps Information
4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information 4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS). This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description PS No.
Page 61: Status-Equipment Status-Um Port Status
4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status 4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status The UM Port status screen displays each port’s status and number for the Unified Messaging system. The screen will be updated every 30 seconds. Each port’s status will be displayed in one of the following ways: •...
Page 62: Status-Equipment Status-Usb
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB 4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB USB Mount Status indicates if a USB memory device is connected to the PBX. There is also an Unmount button. • Mounted: A USB memory device is connected to the PBX. Before removing the USB memory device from the PBX, click Unmount.
Page 63: System Control
Section 5 System Control This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Control menu of the Maintenance screen when programming using Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 64: System Control-Program Update
Each file must be named as indicated in the table to be recognised by the PBX. Hardware that can be updated using Program Update Programme Type Target of Update File Name MPR Programme KX-NS500 Mother Board PFMPR Expansion Unit KX-NS520 Mother Board PEXPS Programme...
Page 65 5.1 System Control—Program Update Programme Type Target of Update File Name CS Programmes (PS CS using a DHLC/DLC card for DECT Portable PDCSDECT Programmes) Station CS using a DHLC/DLC card for 2.4 GHz Portable PDCS24G Station High-density CS for DECT Portable Station PHCSDECT IP-CS for DECT Portable Station PICSDCT...
Page 66: System Control-Program Update-Download Program File
5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File Software updates for PBX hardware components can be downloaded to the PBX. Manual and automatic methods are available. Programme downloading can be performed only in On-line mode. Note •...
Page 67 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File • Check only: The specified download server is checked at the specified times. If an e-mail is entered in Email notification, an e-mail notification is sent when updated files have been discovered. Note If Check only is selected, updated files will have to be downloaded manually (see the manual procedure above).
Page 68: System Control-Program Update-Update Program File
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File Once updated programme files have been downloaded and are stored on a PBX, they can be used to update the system files of the PBX. The update process can be set to be automatically performed at a specified time, or the update process can be carried out manually.
Page 69 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File Timed Update (Automatic update) Specify which cards or devices to update and a time to execute the update. In Email notification, specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive a notification when programme files have been updated.
Page 70: System Control-Program Update-Plug And Update
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update 5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update The Plug and Update feature allows IP-PTs, IP-CSs, and certain PSs to be automatically updated to the latest software version when they are registered to the PBX. When Plug and Update is enabled, the version number of the system software stored on the Main unit is compared to the system software currently in the device, after the device has been registered to the PBX.
Page 71: System Control-Moh
5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install 5.2 System Control—MOH 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install Sound files on the programmer’s PC can be installed to each PBX for use as Music on Hold (MOH). This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Click Browse and select a WAV file to install as an MOH file. Only one file may be installed at a time. As uploading the file to the PBX may require some time, a time can be set in Time Set.
Page 72: System Control-Moh-Delete
5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete 5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete MOH files that are occupying BGM numbers can be deleted. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. In BGM No., specify the BGM numbers to delete MOH files from. Specify "All" to delete the data saved in all BGM numbers.
Page 73: System Control-Moh-Status / Backup
5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup 5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup MOH files stored on a PBX can be downloaded to the user’s PC. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The MOH files saved to the PBX will be listed. Click Backup for the file you would like to back up. One file can be backed up at a time.
Page 74: System Control-System Reset
5.3 System Control—System Reset 5.3 System Control—System Reset When programming changes or other changes to PBX settings require a system reset, this command allows a reset to be performed remotely from Web Maintenance Console. When the system is reset, any settings not saved to the System Memory are lost. A backup should be performed before the reset to ensure no data is lost.
Page 75: System Control-System Shutdown
5.4 System Control—System Shutdown 5.4 System Control—System Shutdown In order to turn off the power to a PBX, it must first be issued a shutdown command using Web Maintenance Console. Follow the procedure below to prepare a PBX for system shutdown. When the system is shut down, any settings not saved to the System Memory are lost.
Page 76 5.4 System Control—System Shutdown PC Programming Manual...
Page 77: Tool
Section 6 Tool This section serves as reference for the Tool menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 78: Tool-System Data Backup
6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB 6.1 Tool—System Data Backup 6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB A PBX’s system data can be backed up to a USB memory device inserted into the PBX’s USB port. At a later time, the USB memory device can be used to restore the backed up system data to a PBX. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 79: Tool-System Data Backup-Backup To Nas
6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS • The USB memory device is removed from the USB port of the PBX during the restoration process. • The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close bracket, space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).
Page 80: Tool-Bri Automatic Configuration
6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and Mode, on the Network tab of the 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port screen.
Page 81: Tool-Ndss Link Data Clear
6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear 6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the QSIG network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.
Page 82: Tool-Call Pickup For My Group
6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group 6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group Allows you to automatically configure settings in 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial and 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial so that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing " 0". To activate this tool When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
Page 83: Tool-Extension List View
6.5 Tool—Extension List View 6.5 Tool—Extension List View Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature. The types that can be displayed are as follows: Type Detail...
Page 84: Tool-Import
6.6 Tool—Import 6.6 Tool—Import Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level. The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using the Export tool (see 6.7 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files.
Page 85 6.6 Tool—Import Related programming: 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table ARS - Leading Digit Data Type Import Destination Location Location Leading Number Leading Digit Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number Related programming: 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number ARS - Except Code Data Type...
Page 86 6.6 Tool—Import Quick Dial Data Type Import Destination Location Dial Dial Phone Number Phone Number Related programming: 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial SIP Extension Data Type Import Destination Location Extension Number Extension Number Password Password Related programming: 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT V-IPGW GW Settings Data Type Import Destination...
Page 87 6.6 Tool—Import Data Type Import Destination T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Redundancy T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages for T.30 messages T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data...
Page 88 6.6 Tool—Import Note Before importing PS registration settings, be sure to de-register any PSs already registered to the PBX. To import system data From the Tool tree menu, select Import, and then click the type of data to import. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open. Select the file.
Page 89: Tool-Export
6.7 Tool—Export 6.7 Tool—Export Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see 6.6 Tool—Import) to update another PBX. Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
Page 90: Tool-Screen Customise
6.8 Tool—Screen Customise 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise Allows you to specify which Setup and Maintenance screens can be accessed in the User (Administrator) account level. This option is only available at Installer level. Selected check boxes will be displayed in the tree menus of Web Maintenance Console to users with the User (Administrator) account level.
Page 91: Tool-Um Data Backup
6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup The UM Data Backup tool can be used to backup and restore Unified Messaging (UM) data. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following voice data can be backed up or restored as individual files. The data can be backed up to a USB memory device connected to the PBX or a NAS.
Page 92: Tool-Um Data Backup-Manual Backup
6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup 6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup Use this procedure to manually back up Unified Messaging system data. For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup. To back up system prompts, select the check box next to System Prompts and select the check boxes of the items you want to back up.
Page 93: Tool-Um Data Backup-Scheduled Backup
6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup 6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup You can schedule backups in advance. The Unified Messaging system will automatically back up the selected data at the scheduled times to a USB memory device or NAS connected to the PBX. (Scheduled backups cannot be made to a local PC.) For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup.
Page 94: Tool-Um Data Restore
6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore Follow the procedure below to restore data backed up using the UM Data Backup tool. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. For more information about the UM Data Backup tool, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup. You can restore data from a USB memory device connected to the PBX or from a file on your local PC.
Page 95 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore • The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close bracket, space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero). • The backup file names stored on the USB memory device should not be changed. If the file names are changed, the system may not be able to detect which backup files correspond to which UM data items.
Page 96: Tool-Um Backup History
6.11 Tool—UM Backup History 6.11 Tool—UM Backup History The following records for backup that have been performed can be checked on this screen: • Description • Parameters • Completion Status • Date & Time • Total Elapsed Time (HH:MM:SS) This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. PC Programming Manual...
Page 97: Tool-Dxdp All Ous
6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS 6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously for the PBX. To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS for the PBX Access Tool—DXDP All OUS from the Maintenance Screen tree view. Click OK.
Page 98: Tool-Contact Information
6.13 Tool—Contact information 6.13 Tool—Contact information Dealers can set contact information for the user of the PBX here. When users select this tree menu item, this information will be displayed for the user’s reference. Input the following information, and then click OK. •...
Page 99: Tool-Ut Option Setting
6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting 6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting Option settings can be specified for KX-UT series SIP phones on a system-wide level. Note The following apply when programming in On-line mode only: • To set these parameters, all installed V-UTEXT cards must first be set to OUS. For details, see 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 100: Tool-Url Information
6.15 Tool—URL Information 6.15 Tool—URL Information The URL address for downloading the IMAP tool can be specified on this screen. This URL address will be used for the Unified Messaging Plug in download button displayed to users when they view the Unified Message tab of their profile in the User menu.
Page 101: Tool-Svm (Simplified Voice Message)
6.16.2 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Check Current Usage 6.16 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message) 6.16.1 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Delete All Recording Deletes all voice messages recorded by the SVM feature. To delete SVM recording data Access Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Delete All Recording. Click OK.
Page 102 6.16.2 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Check Current Usage PC Programming Manual...
Page 103: Utility
Section 7 Utility This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Utility menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 104: Utility-Diagnosis
7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis 7.1 Utility—Diagnosis 7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis Performs diagnostic tests on cards installed in the PBX, to identify the source of problems. If any of the tests listed here returns the result "NG" ("No Good"), contact your dealer. When testing is complete, any cards that were set to OUS status must be returned to INS status if they are to be used again.
Page 105: Utility-Diagnosis-Ping
7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To perform a Ping test Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.
Page 106: Utility-File
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX 7.2 Utility—File 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX Copies PBX system data files from the connected PC to the System Memory installed in the PBX. Pre-existing files in System Memory Card are overwritten. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. To install new main system data that has been copied to the PBX, use the System Reset utility (see 5.3 System Control—System Reset) for DFSYS files.
Page 107: Utility-File-File Transfer Pbx To Pc
7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC Copies system data files from the System Memory and SD card installed in the PBX to the connected PC. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. The files that can be downloaded from the System Memory and SD card are as follows: File Name File Type...
Page 108: Utility-File-File View
7.2.3 Utility—File—File View 7.2.3 Utility—File—File View Displays a list of files in System Memory and SD card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed. This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the in the System Memory and SD card. The effective date, PFMPR-ID, activation key type, number of activation keys, and expiration date of activation keys are displayed on the Detail screen.
Page 109: Utility-File-File Delete
7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete 7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete Allows you to delete files from the System Memory. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. The DFSYS system file cannot be deleted by this utility. Note Programme files cannot be deleted if the Program Update feature’s timed update is set, or if an update is currently being performed.
Page 110: Utility-File-Message File Transfer Pc To Pbx
7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX 7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the System Memory. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary. If the location specified already contains an OGM, it will be overwritten by the newly uploaded message.
Page 111: Utility-File-Message File Transfer Pbx To Pc
7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC 7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the System Memory to the PC. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. To transfer OGMs to the PC From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
Page 112: Utility-Log
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log 7.3 Utility—Log 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log Collects and displays system error information. Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 113 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log [Sample] List of Errors and Solutions For each error code, the error message, probable cause, and solutions are explained. Sub Code Details Sub Code Description 00 (Standalone operation) 01–15 (Corresponding to the site number in a One-look network [2 to 16]) Slot Type For physical slots (including physical slots of Expansion Units) –...
Page 114 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log Sub Code Description Slot Number When X is not 5 Physical shelf Mother board slot: 00 Regular slots: 01–07 Expansion Unit EXP-S card: 00 Optional physical service card slots: 01–05 Virtual shelf Virtual Trunk slots: 01–04 Virtual Extension slots: 05–08 Virtual IP-CS slots: 09–12 When X is 5 YY: Process code...
Page 115: Utility-Log-Syslog
7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog Displays a log of system events. Each entry in the log includes the following information: • Type: Describes the type of system event. • Date: The date and time the system event occurred. • Message: Details about the system event. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 116: Utility-Log-Web-Mc Event Log
7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log 7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log The Web-MC Event Log retains information about user interaction with Web Maintenance Console. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The items displayed on screen are as follows: Item Description Date The date of the event.
Page 117: Utility-Log-Um System Log
7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log 7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log You can export a log of events from the Unified Messaging system for troubleshooting purposes. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Click OK to export a UM System Log file. Click Save to save the data to a local file.
Page 118: Utility-Log-Call Control Log
7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log 7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log Collects and displays Logical Partitioning Call Control Log information. To show the setting change information for the Logical Partitioning feature, press the Condition button. To show the call restriction status of the Logical Partitioning feature, press the Status button. Condition Item Description...
Page 119: Utility-Monitor/Trace
7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace 7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace 7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace This utility collects protocol trace data from the BRI or PRI card, and displays it on the PC. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target BRI or PRI card be set to INS status.
Page 120: Utility-Monitor/Trace-V-Ipgw Protocol Trace
7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace 7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW card. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target V-IPGW card be set to INS status. To save trace data to the System Memory From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW Protocol Trace.
Page 121: Utility-Monitor/Trace-V-Sipgw Protocol Trace
7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace 7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace The trace data of protocol activity can be collected from the V-SIPGW card and saved to a PC using the V-SIPGW Protocol Trace. This option requires that the target V-SIPGW card be set to INS status. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
Page 122: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Cs Status Monitor-Air Sync Group
7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group This utility monitors the status of CSs being synchronised with air synchronisation. CSs receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Current Sync CS information is displayed for IP-CSs that are in INS status.
Page 123: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Cs Status Monitor-Lan Sync Group
7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group This utility monitors the status of CSs being synchronised with LAN synchronisation (KX-NS0154 only). CSs receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Information is displayed for IP-CSs that are in INS status.
Page 124 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file. Enter a file name. Click Save. The dialogue box will close. PC Programming Manual...
Page 125: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Um System Trace (Internal)
7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) 7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) Unified Messaging (UM) system processes can be monitored and logged. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following data can be traced and logged for each UM port, or all UM ports: •...
Page 126: Utility-Monitor/Trace-E1 Signalling Bit Monitor
7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Signalling Bit Monitor 7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Signalling Bit Monitor Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of a E1 card that is installed in an Expansion Unit by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers. For information about Expansion Units see 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.
Page 127: Utility-Monitor/Trace-E1 Line Trace
7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Line Trace 7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Line Trace Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the E1 line card. This utility is intended for use by dealers. For information about Expansion Units, see 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.
Page 128: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Tcp Trace
7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—TCP Trace 7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—TCP Trace The TCP trace result of LAN port transmission activity can be output to the USB port. You must log in using the Installer level account to use this feature. You must access the TCP trace output destination device directly from the Web Maintenance Console when using this feature.
Page 129: Utility-Report
7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report 7.5 Utility—Report 7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period selected.
Page 130: Utility-Report-Ip Extension Statistical Information
7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information 7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information Displays accumulated statistical information on IP extensions, IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only), V-IPEXT cards, V-IPCS cards, and the DSP card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description Collection Started Time...
Page 131: Utility-Report-Um View Reports
7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Unified Messaging (UM) system reports can be generated in order to monitor voice mail operations. Reports can be displayed on a PC, printed, or exported. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To view a report In the View Report tab, select the desired report from the Report Parameters drop-down list.
Page 132 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Report Type Description Call Account Report The call account report displays information about outgoing call activity. Information can be shown by UM port or by mailbox. The report includes date, starting time, used port, connection time, called telephone number, call type, exit status of each callout, total callouts number and the connection time for local or long distance call, and total number of outgoing calls.
Page 133 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Report Type Description Hourly Statistics Report The hourly statistics report displays information about the number of incoming or outgoing calls, the connected time per hour, etc. This report can be set to be automatically cleared according to scheduled settings. PC Programming Manual...
Page 134: Utility-Report-E-Mail Report
7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report 7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report A log of information about e-mail messages sent using the functions of the PBX can be viewed in the E-mail Report. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The information in the report includes the following items for each e-mail message sent: •...
Page 135: Utility-Report-Ip-Cs Information
7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information 7.5.5.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical Information Displays accumulated statistical information on the usage of wireless channels and air synchronisation of IP-CSs. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description Date...
Page 136: Utility-Report-Ip-Cs Information-Lan Sync Information
7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information 7.5.5.2 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information Displays accumulated statistical information on the performance of CSs being synchronised using LAN synchronisation. On this screen, you can view the performance of wireless devices on the LAN, which is useful for troubleshooting and determining whether the number of channels needs to be increased. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 137 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information Item Description Short Term Diag The short term (within the previous 1 hour) diagnosis for LAN synchronisation. • Indeterminable: Status cannot be determined. • Indeterminable (IGMP Querier not found): Status cannot be determined because the IGMP querier could not be found. •...
Page 138 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information Note You can view a list of disconnected calls at the CS by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link in the upper-right corner of the screen. For details, see 7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call Disconnect Log. PC Programming Manual...
Page 139: Utility-Report-Ip-Cs Information-Ps Call Disconnect Log
7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information 7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call Disconnect Log Displays a list of PS calls that have been disconnected at the CS selected on the parent screen. This log can be saved as a text file. This screen can be accessed by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link on either the IP-CS Statistical Information screen or the LAN Sync Information screen.
Page 140: Utility-Activation Key Installation
7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation Activation keys for various features of the PBX can be installed using this screen. Activation key files are copied from a PC to the PBX and activated. Use the below procedure to install activation key files to a PBX. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 141: Utility-Email Notification
7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert 7.7 Utility—Email Notification 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert You can specify e-mail addresses that will receive messages regarding the PBX’s status. System Alarm An e-mail message will be sent to the specified address when there is a system alarm. The e-mail message will contain details about the alarm.
Page 142 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert • Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (12 ports) • Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (16 ports) • Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (24 ports) • Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (8 ports) • Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (16 ports) • Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (24 ports) •...
Page 143: Utility-Email Notification-System Analysis
7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis 7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis Send a specific log file to the designated e-mail address(es). This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Check the Log File Type drop-down menu, select a log file to send to the e-mail address. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
Page 144: Utility-Email Notification-Test Email
7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email 7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email Send a test e-mail to confirm e-mail sending settings are correctly configured. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
Page 145: Utility-Command
7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command 7.8 Utility—Command 7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command System commands can be sent directly to the Unified Messaging system using the Commands dialogue. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialogue: Enter the desired command, then click RUN.
Page 146: Utility-Um - System Prompts Customisation
7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation The System Prompts customisation screen is used to view, play, add, or delete system prompts. The programmer can also check the prompt number and text for these prompts. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 147 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation Starting and Stopping System Prompt Playback Select the desired system prompts. Click Play/Record. Click Play or Stop. PC Programming Manual...
Page 148: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting 7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting Specify the extensions of supervisors that will control the Automatic Two-way Recording feature for agent extensions. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. Click Add/Delete.
Page 149: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Extension Setting
7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting Specify the Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervisor. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. From the Select a Supervisor drop-down list, select a supervisor (specified in 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting).
Page 150: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Extension Setting List
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List In this list you can view the settings of extensions that are programmed to have calls recorded by the Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
Page 151 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Value Range On, Off Feature Guide References 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager ICDG Incoming Only Specifies whether only trunk calls that are received through an incoming call distribution group to the extension are automatically recorded. Note External Call must be set to "On"...
Page 152 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Feature Guide References 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager PC Programming Manual...
Page 153: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Maintenance
7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance 7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance Automatic Two-way Recording can be enabled or disabled, or set to record until a specified date and time by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. To start Automatic Two-way Recording, click Start. The button will change to display Stop. Two-way recording for all designated extensions will continue until one of the following occurs: •...
Page 154: Utility-Um - System Maintenance
7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance 7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance Programme settings for Unified Messaging (UM) system maintenance. System Maintenance Mode Specifies whether to enable or disable System Maintenance Mode. System Maintenance Start Time Specifies the System Maintenance start time. After specifying the settings on this screen, click OK.
Page 155: Utility-Cs-Web Connection
7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection You can specify the URL of the Super Master CS for your system, which will be used for accessing online CS-Web system programming. For details about the Super Master CS and setting up SIP-CSs, refer to the SIP-CS Installation Guide.
Page 156 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection PC Programming Manual...
Page 157: Users
Section 8 Users This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Users menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 158: Users-User Profiles
8.1 Users—User Profiles 8.1 Users—User Profiles Manage PBX settings on a per-user level. Information for each user account is displayed and can be added, edited, or and deleted by a User (Administrator) or Installer level account. Note • For User (Administrator) accounts to change User (User) account settings, the Installer account must use the Screen Customise tool to allow User (Administrator) accounts to view the Users—User Profiles screen.
Page 159 8.1 Users—User Profiles Item Description FWD/DND setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls from extensions. Mode FWD setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD destination for calls from extensions. Destination For settings and details for FWD/DND items, refer to the following: •...
Page 160: Users-User Profiles-Advanced Setting
8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting When User (User) level accounts access their user profiles, they may view and edit items for their account as explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User. In addition, some advanced settings can also be programmed by users.
Page 161 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Call Transfer Status—VIP Filter Specifies whether calls from certain telephone numbers will be transferred directly to a specified extension or telephone number. Note This setting can only be set to "Enable" when Call Transfer Status—Selection is set to "Leave a Message".
Page 162 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number - 1 If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Call Transfer Status—Selection, specifying a telephone number here will transfer the caller to that telephone number. Note If "Call screening"...
Page 163 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator. Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to the top menu and try another extension. Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service. Feature Guide References 3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario Incomplete Call Handling for Busy...
Page 164: Users-Add User
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User 8.2 Users—Add User 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User The Add User—Single User screen provides a method to create user accounts and establish PBX settings on a per-user level. When adding a user, the following settings can be specified. This screen will also be displayed with information already entered when editing an existing user.
Page 165 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Contact Item Description Extension No. Select an extension for the user from the drop-down list. Device Displays the device type of the selected extension. Extension PIN* Specifies the user’s extension PIN. Specifies the user’s Direct Dial In (DDI) number. Fax* Specifies the user’s fax number.
Page 166 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Item Description Prompt Registration* Click Prompt Registration to open the User Prompt Registration screen. The following prompts can be recorded in this screen: • Mailbox owner name • Personal greetings (No Answer, Busy, After Hour, Caller ID Greeting, Temporary Greeting and Absent Message) •...
Page 167 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Item Description Advanced setting* Click to view the selected mailbox’s settings. See 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings. Note When User (User) level accounts access these settings, additional items are displayed. See 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting. Unified Messaging Click to open a new window in your Web browser and access the download Plug in site for the IMAP Session Controller software.
Page 168: Users-Add User-Multiple Users
8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users 8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users The Add User—Multiple Users screen provides a method to create multiple user profiles for a range of extensions at one time. In the From and To fields, specify the range of extensions to create profiles for. Select the Create mailboxes with the same number as the extensions check box if you want to create Unified Messaging mailboxes whose mailbox numbers are the same as the assigned extension numbers.
Page 169: Users-Automatic Two-Way Recording
8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording 8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording supervisors. See 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. 8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for extensions they are supervising.
Page 170: Users-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Record List
8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List 8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Select one or more mailboxes, and click OK. Messages recorded in the selected mailbox(es) will be displayed. You can filter the list of messages displayed or play a message.
Page 171: Users-Icdg Management
8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor 8.4 Users—ICDG Management This screen is accessible only by users designated as an ACD supervisor. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Description Users designated as an ACD supervisor can specify an ICD group to monitor, set monitoring conditions, and begin monitoring.
Page 172 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Value Range ICD groups Feature Guide References 2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Options—Member Status View Mode Specifies the display mode of the status of group members. Value Range Standard, Simple Feature Guide References 2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Number of Current Waiting Calls (1-30) Specifies the threshold number of current waiting calls.
Page 173 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Feature Guide References 2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Blinking Specifies whether highlighted items blink on the monitor screen. Value Range Enable, Disable Feature Guide References 2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Full Screen Display (pixels) Select the display resolution of the monitor screen for full screen display.
Page 174: Users-Icdg Management-Acd Report
8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Description On this screen, users designated as an ACD supervisor can create ACD reports on ICD groups after filtering according to group, agent, or call. Filtering types are separated by tabs. Supervisor selection Selects the ACD supervisor from a drop-down list.
Page 175 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Group Group—View Report To display a report according to groups, follow the procedure below. This feature requires the Call Centre Feature Enhancement activation key. If this activation key is not installed, the View Report button is greyed out.
Page 176 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report • Graph: Click the Graph button to display the report in graph form on the ACD Report - Group Graph screen. Click the Print button to print the graph. • Export: Click the Export button to output the report to a local PC as a file. •...
Page 177 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Agent Agent—View Report To display a report according to agents, follow the procedure below. This feature requires the Call Centre Feature Enhancement activation key. If this activation key is not installed, the View Report button is greyed out.
Page 178 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Agent—Filter Settings—Select Agent To select the target agent for creating a report, follow the procedure below. Click the Select button. Click an agent from those displayed in the Available Agent for ACD Report window to select it. Up to 8192 agents are displayed, and up to 128 agents can be selected from the list.
Page 179 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Item Description Wait Time The waiting time. (HH:MM:SS) Trunk The incoming trunk group number. Caller ID/CLIP The caller’s number. Unanswered is displayed when the agent did not answer the call if the ICD group distribution method is set to Uniform Call Distribution or Priority Hunting.
Page 180 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Value Range Yesterday, Last Week, Last Month, Today, This Week, This Month, Custom Period If Custom Period is selected, set Start Date/Start Time/End Date/End Time also. Feature Guide References 2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Call—Filter Settings—Call Filter Mode Calls that are the target of an ACD report can be filtered in the following 3 ways.
Page 181: Users-Icdg Management-Acd Scheduled Export
8.4.3 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export 8.4.3 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export On this screen, users can register or delete the schedule for the automatic export of ACD Report data. The PBX system will automatically export the selected ACD Report data at the scheduled times to a USB memory device or NAS connected to the PBX.
Page 182: Users-Icdg Management-Acd Export History
8.4.4 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Export History 8.4.4 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Export History The export history for ACD Report data can be checked on this screen. The following items are recorded for each export: • Date/Time • Description • Parameters • Report Profile •...
Page 183: Pbx Configuration-[1] Configuration
Section 9 PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Configuration menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 184: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed. Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary of status and versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Slot Summary button (see 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property).
Page 185 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot To remove a card from the PBX Move the mouse pointer over the card to remove. A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer. Select Delete. Click OK to confirm. The card will be removed. Note The cards in Slot No.1-No.3 of the Basic Unit and the card in Slot No.1 of the Expansion Unit cannot be deleted because these cards are pre-installed.
Page 186 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Card Types Supported by the Main Unit Max. No/ Max. No/Line Installation Type Card Type Card Programming Card Type Type 9.11 PBX V-IPGW16: Virtual Configuration—[1-1] 16-Channel VoIP Configuration—Slot Gateway Card —Shelf Property—V-IPGW (Trunk) 9.8 PBX V-SIPGW16: Virtual Configuration—[1-1] 16-Channel SIP Trunk Configuration—Slot...
Page 187 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Max. No/ Max. No/Line Installation Type Card Type Card Programming Card Type Type 9.23 PBX LCOT6: 6-port Configuration—[1-1] Analogue Trunk Card Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type PRI23: PRI23 Trunk 9.25 PBX Card Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type PRI30/E1: PRI30/E1 (Trunk)
Page 188 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Max. No/ Max. No/Line Installation Type Card Type Card Programming Card Type Type 9.23 PBX LCOT6: 6-port Configuration—[1-1] Analogue Trunk Card Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type PRI23: PRI23 Trunk 9.25 PBX Card Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type PRI30/E1: PRI30/E1 (Trunk)
Page 189 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Item Description Shelf Indicates the physical or virtual shelf where the card, extension, or device is located in the PBX. • Shelf "1" is the physical shelf of the Main Unit. • Shelf "2" corresponds to the Expansion unit connected to EXP-M port 1. •...
Page 190: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-System Property
9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main The properties of the PBX system can be specified. Main DSP CODEC G.711 only (SIP extension) Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 codec for SIP extension calls. Value Range Enable, Disable DSP CODEC G.711 only (IP-GW)
Page 191: System Status
9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main System Status CPU Usage Displays the system CPU’s current processor load, expressed as a percentage of total capacity (reference only). Value Range 0–100% Memory Usage Displays the amount of system memory currently being used, displayed as a percentage of total capacity (reference only).
Page 192 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Value Range Max. 20 Characters Bandwidth to Gatekeeper Specifies the used bandwidth information notified to the gatekeeper. Value Range 1–255 kbps Primary Gatekeeper IP Address Specifies the IP address of the primary gatekeeper. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Primary Gatekeeper Port Number Specifies the port number of the primary gatekeeper.
Page 193 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main QSIG Connectionless Tunnelling TCP Port Number Specifies the TCP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network. Value Range 1–65535 QSIG Connectionless Tunnelling UDP Port Number Specifies the UDP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network.
Page 194 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Value Range Disable (TDE), Enable (TDA) Protocol Specifies the type of protocol for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network. Value Range TCP, UDP Progress Tone Send Mode Specifies whether to send call progress tones to the destination. When selecting External, call progress tones are audible at the destination.
Page 195 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
Page 196 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main—V-IPGW–GW Settings–Option 1— IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd, 3rd DTMF Specifies the method to transport DTMF tones. Value Range Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245) Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833.
Page 197 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Value Range 0–7 T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 0–3 T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Transferred TCF, Local TCF V-IPGW–DN2IP...
Page 198: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-System Property-Site
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site GW No. Specifies the number of the destination gateway device. This setting is only available when GW No./GW Group Selection on this screen is set to GW No.. Value Range 1–512 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site The properties of the PBX site can be specified.
Page 199 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF PBX Version Indicates the software version of the PBX (reference only). Value Range 0000.00000 - 9999.99999 Data Version Indicates the version number of the data (reference only). Value Range 0000.0000 - 9999.9999 SRAM Version Indicates the version number of the SRAM (reference only).
Page 200 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the site. Value Range 1–32 Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only). Value Range P2P Group Name Feature Guide References...
Page 201 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site SIP over TCP/IP (V-SIPGW) *) Specifies whether or not to use SIP over TCP/IP protocol for the site. When this setting is enabled, SIP trunks cannot use the UDP/IP protocol. Note If this setting is changed, the V-IPGW cards and/or V-SIPGW cards installed at the site will be deleted. Value Range Disable, Enable VoIP-DSP Options...
Page 202 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range Disable, Enable Jitter Compensation Operation for G.729A Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for communications using the G.729A codec. Value Range Disable, Enable Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Voice Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications. Value Range 0–200 ms Jitter Buffer Delay Max.
Page 203 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for FAX Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for fax communications. Value Range 0–200 ms Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for FAX Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for fax communications. Value Range 1000–65530 ms DTMF Detection Level for G.711A...
Page 204 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range OFF, ON CED Signal Fixation Detection Time Specifies the minimum length of time required for the CED (called station identification) signal to be detected by the PBX. Value Range 50 ´ n (n=1–100) ms CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON) - SIP Extension Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal for SIP extensions.
Page 205 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site T38 FAX Transmit Level (Network to PBX) A-Law Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the codec used is G.711A. Value Range -13–2 dB T38 FAX Transmit Level (Network to PBX) Mu-Law Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the codec used is G.711Mu.
Page 206 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Value Range 1024–65535 Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) UDP Port No.
Page 207 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Data Transmission Protocol (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT Specifies the HTTPS port of the PBX-side ACS for data communication with KX-UT series SIP phones. Value Range 0–65535 (Setting "0" will close port access for this feature) Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Firmware Update Port No.
Page 208 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in Communication Assistant Feature Guide References 2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant) LAN Status LINK for Main Port Indicates the current connection status of the main port (reference only). Value Range 1: Disconnect, 0: Connect Media Relay Common—NAT - External IP Address...
Page 209 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out for remote connections for IP extensions. Value Range Blank UDP, None Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type for IP-CS Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out for remote connections for IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only).
Page 210 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No. Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. Value Range 1–65535 Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.
Page 211 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site UT Extension—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTP) Port No. Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections used for downloading data to KX-UT series SIP phones. Value Range 1–65535 Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTPS) Port No.
Page 212 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—SIP Register Expire Time (s) Specifies the length of time that will elapse before the current registration expires. Value Range 10–3600 s Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—PERIODIC Ability Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for connected remote extensions.
Page 213: Sip Extension
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Option—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server. If using a separate IP address from Common—NAT - External IP Address, configure this setting. Value Range Blank, 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254 Feature Guide References...
Page 214 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range 10–3600 s Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension SIP Location Hold Time Min. Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions. Value Range 10–3600 s Feature Guide References...
Page 215 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No. Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. Value Range 1–65535 Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS)
Page 216 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server.
Page 217 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet Type Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out for remote connections. Value Range Register, Blank UDP, None Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s) Specifies the time interval between transmissions of the Keep Alive packet.
Page 218 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No. Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections that is used when the gateway specified in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT is not available.
Page 219 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Echo Cancellation The settings in this tab are for non-IP calls. Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB DSP Digital Gain (Up)
Page 220 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range -14–6 dB DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-SIPEXT side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V-SIPEXT card. Value Range -14–6 dB DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-UTEXT side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V-UTEXT...
Page 221 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range -14–6 dB NLP Setting on TDM side for conference Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong PC Programming Manual...
Page 222: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-System Property-Slot Summary
9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX. Click one of the following tabs to view a summary of the shelf in the PBX: • Physical Shelf: View the physical card shelf. •...
Page 223 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Version Indicates the software version of the installed card (reference only). Value Range Version number PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Virtual Shelf The Shelf and Slot for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 224 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot PC Programming Manual...
Page 225: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-System Property-Nsvm
9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM Settings related to audio quality and sound detection for the PBX site can be specified. Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Page 226 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON) Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal. Value Range 20–5000 ms CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected. Value Range 20–5000 ms CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter...
Page 227 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM Value Range 1000–60000 (ms) PC Programming Manual...
Page 228: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Activation Key Status
9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Refreshes and displays information about activation keys provided by any activation key files in the System Memory and by pre-installed activation keys on the mother board. To access this screen, click the Activation Key button on the Configuration—Slot main screen.
Page 229 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status • Poltys Number notice • Poltys CCAgent (5 users) • Poltys CCRecord SIP (4 ports) MPR-ID Indicates the ID number of the mother board (reference only). Value Range ID number of the mother board Activated Feature Indicates the type of activation keys (reference only).
Page 230 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Poltys CCView Supervisor A.L.: CCView Supervisor (annual licence) Poltys CCView CRM P-up: Independent Desktop CRM Popup SW with 1st Party TSP Poltys CCView CRM P-up A.L.: Independent Desktop CRM Popup SW with 1st Party TSP (annual licence) Poltys Number notice: Dial Number Notification Poltys Number notice A.L.: Dial Number Notification (annual licence) Poltys CCAgent: CCAgent With Internal CRM...
Page 231: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Voip Property
9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property 9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting Allows you to install or remove IP extension cards by entering the number of IP extensions (IP-PT, UT/UDT or SIP extension) and to set IP Terminal Registration Mode. When you place the mouse cursor over the VoIP Property button on the Slot screen, click the VoIP(Ext) Setting button to open the VoIP(Ext) Setting screen.
Page 232 9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting Value Range 0–4 Number of IP Extensions—Number of cards—V-SIPEXT32 Indicates the number of installed V-SIPEXT32 cards (reference only). Value Range 0–4 Number of IP Extensions—Number of cards—Total Indicates the number of total installed IP Extension cards (reference only). Value Range 0–4 IP Terminal Registration Mode Specifies the IP Terminal registration mode for registering IP telephones to the PBX.
Page 233: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Voip Property-Voip (Trunk) Setting
9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting Allows you to add new SIP trunk accounts by entering the number of SIP trunk port and some SIP trunk settings. When you place the mouse cursor over the VoIP Property button on the Slot screen, click the VoIP (Trunk) Setting button to open the VoIP (Trunk) Setting screen.
Page 234 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting Value Range Max. 100 characters Account Setting—SIP Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of the SIP proxy server. This setting is compulsory when not using the DNS server. Note Specify the IP address of the outbound proxy server, if provided by the SIP provider. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Account Setting—SIP Server Domain / Proxy Domain ( Max.100 characters)
Page 235 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting Property Setting—Header Type Specifies the header of the SIP message in which the caller information is stored. Value Range From Header, P-Preferred-Identity Header Property Setting—Anonymous format in "From" header Specifies the format of the "From" header when not sending caller ID. Value Range Display name and SIP-URI, Display name only Note If "Display name and SIP-URI"...
Page 236: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Um Card Property
9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system can be specified. Place the mouse cursor over the UM Property button on the Slot screen, and click the Card Property button to open the UM Card Property screen.
Page 237 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property Value Range Disable, Enable CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON) Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal. Value Range 20–5000 ms CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected.
Page 238: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Um Port Property
9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system’s ports can be specified. Place the mouse cursor over the UM Property button on the Slot screen, and click the Port Property button to open the UM Port Property screen.
Page 239: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-Port Type View
9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View Displays the number of connected telephones, devices, and Cell Stations (CSs). This screen can be accessed from the Port Property screen of any extension cards in use in the PBX system, including extension cards of Expansion Units.
Page 240: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Shelf Property-V-Sipgw
9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW Common settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Icon Description In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type. Icon Description for Parameter Type Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.
Page 241 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW NAT - Keep Alive Packet Type Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out. Value Range Blank UDP, None NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Specifies the interval time until the next Keep Alive packet is sent. Note This interval must be shorter than the NAT binding time of the router.
Page 242 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW Value Range 0–1600 ms SIP Called Party Number Check Ability Specifies whether to receive a SIP trunk call when receiving the INVITE message with an incorrect target SIP-URI. The setting specified here is also applied when the request header is blank or contains characters that cannot be modified to a receivable number.
Page 243 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW Value Range ToS, DSCP, HEX SIP QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS Ability. Value Range 0–7 SIP QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS Ability.
Page 244: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-V-Sipgw
9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPGW 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPGW Common card settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. DNS SRV Record Resolve Ability Specifies whether to request that the DNS server translates domain names into IP addresses using the DNS SRV record.
Page 245: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-V-Sipgw
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Programming Port Properties Some of the parameters can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider for each virtual SIP gateway port. Icon Description In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type. Icon Description for Parameter Type Programmed automatically by selecting the desired SIP provider in Select Provider.
Page 246 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Ensure that the Trunk Adaptor is connected to the network and a power supply, and that all ports to be set are OUS. Click Trunk Adaptor. The Trunk Adaptor List screen is displayed. Enter a name (20 characters or less) for the Trunk Adaptor in Trunk Adaptor Name. Enter the Trunk Adaptor’s IP address in Trunk Adaptor IP Address.
Page 247 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Feature Guide References 5.3.1 Trunk Adaptor Connection Trunk Property Specifies the networking type of each SIP trunk. Note Connection Attribute is set to "Trunk Adaptor" for the port, only "Public" will be available for this setting. Value Range Public, VPN Channel Attribute...
Page 248 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Note Specify the IP address of the outbound proxy server, if provided by the SIP provider. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 SIP Server IP Address for Failover Specifies the IP address of the SIP proxy server for failover. Note Specify the IP address of the outbound proxy server for failover, if provided by the SIP provider.
Page 249 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only). Value Range P2P Group Name PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Main— P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Account The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 250 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Register The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 251 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Registrar Server IP Address for Failover Specifies the IP address of the SIP registrar server for failover. Note Specify the IP address of the outbound registrar server for failover, if provided by the SIP provider. This setting cannot be changed while the V-SIPGW card is set to INS.
Page 252 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 STUN Server Port Number Specifies the port number of the STUN server. Value Range 1–65535 Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 253 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Session Incoming Refresher Request Specifies the type of method used for establishing the session interval. Value Range UAC, UAS SIP 200 Response Timer (*100 ms) Specifies the amount of time to wait for a SIP 200 (OK) response when establishing a connection between two parties.
Page 254 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Calling Party The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 255 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Number Format Selects the format of the CLIP number to be sent to the called party. Value Range International, +International, National Remove Digit Specifies the number of leading digits of the CLIP number to be removed. This setting is compulsory when PBX-CLIP is selected in From Header—User Part or P-Preferred-Identity Header—User Part.
Page 256 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Called Party The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 257 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Voice/FAX The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 258 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Value Range Disable, Enable Inform Annex B Status (G.729A) Specifies whether to inform that Annex B for the G.729 codec is not supported. Value Range Disable, Enable Note Annex B expansion features for the G.729 codec are not supported by the V-SIPGW card. However, it is necessary to inform some carriers of this fact to avoid having calls disconnected.
Page 259 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Value Range 96–127 RTP/RTCP The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 260 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Value Range 00–FF RTCP Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether to enable each port to send RTCP packets. Value Range Disable, Enable RTCP Packet Interval Specifies the interval time until the next RTCP packet is sent. Value Range 5–60 s Keep Alive Timer...
Page 261 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Value Range Disable, Enable T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 0–7 T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 0–3 T38 FAX Rate Management Method...
Page 262 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. T38 FAX QoS Available Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range ToS, DSCP, HEX T38 FAX QoS-ToS Priority...
Page 263 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Page 264 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. CLIP (Receive) Specify where caller information about an incoming call is obtained: •...
Page 265 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Attended Transfer(REFER) Specifies whether to allow attended transfers using REFER. Value Range Yes, No Advanced The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status.
Page 266: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Shelf Property-V-Ipgw
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Main Gatekeeper Available Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. Value Range Disable, Enable RTCP Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether to enable the PBX to send RTCP packets.
Page 267 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW RTP QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ. Value Range 0–63 RTP QoS-HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number. Value Range 00–FF T38 FAX QoS Available Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 268 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB Feature Guide References...
Page 269 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) QSIG-CT Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network. Value Range No, Yes Feature Guide References 4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG QSIG-CF Enables a call to be forwarded to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.
Page 270: Incoming Call
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW Dial End Code Specifies the delimiter code to be used to signal the end of a dialled number. Value Range 0–9, #, * Incoming Call Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.
Page 271 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Packet Sampling Time for G.729A Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms FAX Detection Ability...
Page 272 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW Value Range 96–127 T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 272–512 T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Disable, Enable T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages...
Page 273 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 274 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 275: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Shelf Property-V-Ipgw-Gk Settings
9.11.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—GK Settings 9.11.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—GK Settings Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed. Destination Number Specifies a telephone number to register with a gatekeeper. Value Range Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9) Device Name Specifies the name of the device for programming reference. Value Range Max.
Page 276: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Shelf Property-V-Ipgw-Hunt Pattern
9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—Hunt Pattern 9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—Hunt Pattern The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming calls through virtual IP trunks to the PBX. A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed. Hunt Pattern 1–16 Leading Number Specifies the leading digits of dialled numbers by which to determine the call distribution port group to direct...
Page 277: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-V-Ipgw
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Trunk Adaptor To connect to a Trunk Adaptor, follow the steps below.
Page 278 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW Feature Guide References 4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 279: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-V-Ipext
The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
Page 280 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Page 281 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT Resending Time Out (MGCP) Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Value Range 75–120 s Feature Guide References...
Page 282: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-V-Ipext
9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP extension port. IP-PT Registration and De-registration An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used. Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
Page 283 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialogue box will appear. Click OK. A dialogue box will appear. Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed". Click Close.
Page 284 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT Status Indicates whether a certain IP-PT is registered (reference only). Value Range None, Registered Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address) Specifies the MAC address of the IP-PT. This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS.
Page 285 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT PC Programming Manual References 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main— P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only). Value Range P2P Group Name PC Programming Manual References 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main—...
Page 286 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 287 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) IP Codec Priority Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data. Some codecs may become unavailable depending on the value set here, as follows: –...
Page 288 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Voice The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
Page 289 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833). Value Range 96–127 Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Remote Place...
Page 290 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Phone Location Specifies the type of extension connected to the port. Value Range Local: The extension is located on the same network as the PBX (standard configuration). Remote (MRG): The extension is accessing the PBX remotely (use Media Relay Gateway).
Page 291: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-V-Sipext
9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Feature Guide References...
Page 292 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension PC Programming Manual...
Page 293: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-V-Sipext
9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Main Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
Page 294 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the SIP Extension (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group. Value Range 1–32 PC Programming Manual References 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main—...
Page 295 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT Feature Guide References 2.20.1 Message Waiting 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
Page 296 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT Value Range Automatic, Speech, Audio Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Feature Guide References...
Page 297 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT the Copy to button. This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS, and the programmer must be in On-line mode. Value Range 4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z) Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Connection...
Page 298 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT Password Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. While it is possible to enter a password manually for each SIP Extension, you can copy the value for Extension Number to Password by clicking the Copy to button.
Page 299 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal. Value Range No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 300 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Transferred TCF, Local TCF Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension PC Programming Manual...
Page 301: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-V-Ipcs
The properties of the V-IPCS card can be specified. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
Page 302 Disable, 10–120 s First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Page 303: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-V-Ipcs
9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP-CS port. IP-CS Registration and De-registration An IP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-CS before it can be used. Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
Page 304 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed". Click Close. Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "None". Main The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 305 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the IP-CS (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Program Ver. Indicates the programme software file version of the IP-CS (reference only). Value Range Version number Air Sync Group No Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the IP-CS.
Page 306 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 307 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS Remote Place The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. CS Name Specifies if the IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only) name of the port. Value Range Max.
Page 308: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-V-Utext
9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-UTEXT 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-UTEXT Various settings can be programmed for V-UTEXT cards. Click Common Settings to change these settings. Main Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 24 ms, 128 ms DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Page 309 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-UTEXT PERIODIC Inform Interval Specifies the polling interval for alive monitoring when PERIODIC Inform is set to "Enable". Value Range 30–3600 s INFORM retransmission counter Specifies the number of times the PERIODIC Inform is sent for extensions when attempting to establish a connection.
Page 310: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-V-Utext
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT Various settings can be programmed for the ports of V-UTEXT cards. KX-UT Series SIP Phone, S-PS, and SIP-CS Registration and De-registration A KX-UT series SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS before it can be used.
Page 311 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT Click Forced De-registration. A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialogue box will appear.
Page 312 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT Note • This setting cannot be changed if a device has already been registered for the port. De-register the device set for the port before changing the setting. • To change this setting when programming in Off-line mode, and a device is already registered to the port, change the setting of IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address) for the port to "00:00:00:00:00:00", and then click Apply.
Page 313 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address) Specifies the MAC address of the SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS. This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS. Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Note...
Page 314 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT PC Programming Manual References 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only). Value Range P2P Group Name PC Programming Manual References 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection...
Page 315 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT System Speed Dial Download Specifies if the connected SIP phone will download system speed dial entries from the PBX. Value Range Enable, Disable PC Programming Manual References 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main— System Speed Dial Download For UT Extensions SIP QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ.
Page 316 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT Value Range 1–2 ms Jitter Buffer - Initial Delay Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications. Value Range 1–7 ms Gain Type Specifies the type of gain file to distribute to connected SIP devices. Value Range Default, Type1, Type2, Type3 Remote Place...
Page 317 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT Phone Location Specifies the type of extension connected to the port. Value Range Local: The extension is located on the same network as the PBX (standard configuration). Remote (SBC): The extension is accessing the PBX remotely (Simple Remote Connection). Remote (MRG): The extension is accessing the PBX remotely (use Media Relay Gateway).
Page 318: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-Extension Type
9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—Extension Type 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—Extension Type The property for the extension cards can be specified. SLT Pulse Dial Mode Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand SLT Off Hook Time Specifies the minimum length that a pulse dial sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as an off-hook signal.
Page 319 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—Extension Type Value Range Disable: The PBX disconnects the line to prevent placing the call on hold. Enable: The PBX places the call on consultation hold. Feature Guide References 2.13.3 Call Splitting Flash Timing - Min. Specifies the minimum length that a signal sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch flash signal.
Page 320 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—Extension Type Feature Guide References 2.11.10 Parallelled Telephone Ringing Start Mode of Extension Caller ID Specifies the Ringing Start Mode of Extension Caller ID. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. Value Range Mode 1: With Pre-ring signal Mode 2: Without Pre-ring signal...
Page 321: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-Extension Type
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type Various settings can be programmed for each extension port. To view the total number of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 322 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port. Value Range Max. 20 characters XDP Mode Turns XDP mode on or off for the port. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to S-Hybrid.
Page 323 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type VM(DPT): For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration PC Console: For connecting a PC Console (A maximum of 8 PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX.) Feature Guide References 2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Page 324 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type DPT Type—Air Sync Group No Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the CS. This setting is only available when DPT Type—Type on this screen is set to Normal. Value Range None, 1 PC Programming Manual References 19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation Headset OFF/ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with a DPT.
Page 325: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property - Lco Type
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified. Outgoing Guard Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 3–6 s First Dial Timer (CO)
Page 326 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range 64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms Pulse / DTMF Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Page 327 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range Other, 60%, 67% PC Programming Manual References 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Page 328 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling Selects the type of Caller ID signalling provided by the telephone company. Value Range FSK, FSK (with Visual Caller ID), DTMF Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Max Receive Time Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network.
Page 329 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Header Examination Enables the PBX to check the header of received Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References...
Page 330 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range None, *, #, A, B, C, D Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range None, *, #, A, B, C, D Feature Guide References...
Page 331: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property - Lco Port
Value Range CO, MOH, External Pager Installation Manual References 4.3.4 LCOT6 in KX-NS500 (installed by default) Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 332 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References 2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line.
Page 333 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port PC Programming Manual References 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Feature Guide References 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Page 334: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property - Bri Type/Pri Type
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type The properties of the PRI or BRI card can be specified. ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 335 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call.
Page 336 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message.
Page 337 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms ISDN Extension—T203 Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms ISDN Extension—T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. Value Range 0–18000 ´...
Page 338 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T306 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN. This setting is used when inband tones are supplied. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 339 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T320 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms ISDN Extension—T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 340: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property - Bri Port
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port. Main The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 341 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Value Range No Transmission: Status Message is not sent. When Mandatory error detection: Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected. When Option / Mandatory error detection: Send the Status Message when an error (Option or Mandatory) is detected.
Page 342 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone. Value Range Disable, Enable ISDN Outgoing Call Type...
Page 343 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port 2-link: Two TEIs are assigned to the BRI CO port. (Available when Access Mode on the Network tab is set to P-MP.) Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.
Page 344 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Feature Guide References 5.2.5.1 ISDN Extension Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00) Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00". This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to Extension.
Page 345 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 346 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY TEI Mode Specifies the TEI mode assigned to the BRI port. Value Range Automatic, Fix 0–Fix 63 Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Network Numbering Plan The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 347 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 4.3.1 TIE Line Service 4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN) Calling Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks. Value Range Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private...
Page 348 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 349 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port) Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode.
Page 350: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property - Pri Port
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port. Main The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 351 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Status Receive Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status of the call. Value Range Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network. Disconnect: Disconnect the call.
Page 352 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port) Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode.
Page 353 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY ISDN Centrex Enables the use of the telephone company’s ISDN Centrex Service features. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network.
Page 354: Network Configuration
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port • ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned. Value Range CO: For connecting to public network Extension: For connecting to extension QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port) QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Page 355 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 356 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the port. Value Range Public: Public network Private: Private Network VPN: Virtual Private Network Feature Guide References 4.3.1 TIE Line Service...
Page 357 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Port Type Selects the port type. Note • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX. • ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Page 358 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port CCBS Type Selects the type of call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) feature, from which the specified number of digits are deleted. CCBS Delete Digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number. Value Range ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated Feature Guide References...
Page 359: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-E1 Type
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type The properties of the E1 card can be specified. To adjust related settings, click Line Signal Setting, MFC-R2 Setting 1, and MFC-R2 Setting 2. Line Coding Selects the line coding type of E1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the E1 card. Value Range HDB3, AMI Frame Sequence...
Page 360 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type LIU Send Option Indicates the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU (reference only). Value Range Mode 1-Mode 8 LIU Receive Option Selects the receiving level (Receive Equalisation) of LIU. Value Range Automatic, 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB RAI Signal Detection Mode Selects the RAI signal detection mode.
Page 361: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-E1 Type Line Signal Setting
9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting DR2 Setting Type Selects the control type of the DR2 (Digital System R2) signal. Value Range Normal, Option 1, Option 3 Inter-digit Timer Specifies the pseudo-answer time. This setting is available only when Option 1 or Option 3 is selected in DR2 Setting Type on this screen.
Page 362 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting Value Range No Detection: Meter pulses are not sent or received. Outgoing call only: Sends a call charge meter pulse for outgoing trunk calls. Both calls: Sends and receives call charge meter pulses. Feature Guide References 2.29.1 E1 Line Service Meter Pulse Detection—Bit Position Specifies the bit position of a call charge meter pulse.
Page 363 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting Value Range -31 dB–0 dB DSP Gain Adjustment—MFC-R2 Receive Specifies the strength range within which an MFC-R2 signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as an MFC-R2 signal. Value Range -38 - 0 dB – -23 - 0 dB Frame Error Detection—Error Detection Specifies whether the PBX detects frame synchronisation errors.
Page 364: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-E1 Type Mfc-R2 Setting 1
9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 ANI Service—Mode Selects the ANI (Automatic Number Identification) service mode. Value Range None: ANI service is not activated. Incoming call only: Receives the caller’s number from the E1 line. Outgoing call only: Sends the caller’s number to the E1 line. Both calls: Sends and receives the caller’s number through the E1 line.
Page 365 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Complete (1)–(4) Specifies the code used to indicate the end of an ANI number. Value Range ANI Complete (1): 1–15 ANI Complete (2)–(4): Undefined, 1–15 Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Reject Specifies the code used to reject an ANI number. Value Range 1–15 Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit...
Page 366 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 Value Range 1–15 MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[*] code Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [*]. Value Range 11–15 MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[#] code Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [#]. Value Range 11–15 PC Programming Manual...
Page 367: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-E1 Type Mfc-R2 Setting 2
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-A Code Assignment—Address Complete Specifies the address complete (completion of dial reception) code sent to the telephone company. Value Range 1–15 Group-A Code Assignment—ANI Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send an ANI number. Value Range 1–15 Group-A Code Assignment—ANI (N+1)
Page 368 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Group-A Code Assignment—(N-1) Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-1)th digit of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Group-A Code Assignment—(N-2) Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-2)th digit of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Group-A Code Assignment—(N-3) Request...
Page 369 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Group-B Code Assignment—Unallocated Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the received number is not defined. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Group-B Code Assignment—Congestion Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the network is congested. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Group-B Code Assignment—Out-of-Service...
Page 370: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-E1 Port
9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Various settings can be programmed for each E1 channel. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Indicates the channel number (reference only).
Page 371 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Channel Type Selects the channel type. Value Range Undefined: Not assigned DR2: Digital System R2 Feature Guide References 2.29.1 E1 Line Service Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the E&M channel. Value Range Public: Use the DIL/DDI/DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls. Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.
Page 372 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Receive Digits Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received from a DDI/DID number when receiving a call with the DDI/DID number. Value Range 0–15 CPC Detection Time—Out, In Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line.
Page 373 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Feature Guide References 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Page 374: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3
9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3 Settings for Expansion Units connected to the PBX over a stacking connection can be programmed. Click Expansion Unit1, Expansion Unit2 or Expansion Unit3 on the Slot screen to view the physical card shelf of the Expansion Unit.
Page 375 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3 • 3: Expansion Unit2 • 4: Expansion Unit3 Slot: The physical slot number within the Expansion Unit where the card is installed. Programming Port Properties for cards installed in Expansion Units To change the status of a port when programming via Web Maintenance Console, click the desired cell in the Connection column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 376: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-Doorphone Card
9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE Card 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE Card The doorphone card’s settings can be programmed. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Status Specifies the port’s status.
Page 377: Pbx Configuration-[1-2] Configuration-Portable Station
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. PS Registration and De-registration A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used. Programming instructions of the PBX are given below;...
Page 378 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Personal Identification Number Specifies the Personal Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS to the wrong PBX. Note that the same PIN should be entered at the PS, before the PS is registered to the PBX. Value Range 4 digits (consisting of 0–9) Feature Guide References...
Page 379 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Feature Guide References 5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection Status Indicates whether a certain PS is registered (reference only). Value Range None, Registered Feature Guide References 5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection PC Programming Manual...
Page 380: Pbx Configuration-[1-3] Configuration-Option
9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option 9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option System options can be programmed. System Wireless—System ID Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS (reference only). To clear the System ID Click the Clear Master CS button. A warning will be displayed. Confirm the contents of the warning, and then click Yes. Note The System ID can be cleared using this procedure only in Off-line mode.
Page 381 9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option Value Range ISDN Standard Mode: The CCBS, CF, CT, and Unified Messaging features are supported. DIL and DID call distribution are available for the D channel. T1-LCOT mode: DIL and DID call distribution are available for all 23B channels. The CCBS, CF, CT, and Unified Messaging features are not available in this mode.
Page 382: Pbx Configuration-[1-4] Configuration-Clock Priority
9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority 9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority Shelf-Slot Number Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI and PRI cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an external source to the PBX. Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the telephone company provides. To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below: Assign a Clock Priority to each slot.
Page 383: Pbx Configuration-[1-5] Configuration-Dsp Resource
9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting 9.38 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource IP communications that are handled by the PBX require DSP resources. DSP resources can be reserved for various functions of the PBX. The DSP resource advisor is a tool that analyses the configuration and user requirements for the system in order to recommend which DSP card should be used.
Page 384 9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Value Range 0–506 VoIP calls Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Services—Unified message Specifies the number of UM ports to reserve DSP resources for. Value Range 0–25 ports (UM: 24 ports, Fax: 1 port) Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Services—Two-way Recording...
Page 385 9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Services—Free resources (G.711) Indicates the amount of free DSP resources available to allocate (reference only). Value Range 0–506 DSP resources Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Select a time to apply the set values Specifies when the settings made on this screen are applied.
Page 386: Pbx Configuration-[1-5-1] Configuration-Dsp Resource-Setting-Dsp Resource Advisor
9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting 9.38.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource Advisor The DSP Resource Advisor assists programmers in the allocation of DSP resources to various PBX functions. Note the value of Total Power. This is the total capacity for allocating DSP resources, depending on the DSP card installed in the PBX.
Page 387: Pbx Configuration-[1-5-2] Configuration-Dsp Resource-Usage
9.38.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage 9.38.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage The Usage screen is a graphical display of DSP resource usage. This information is useful to analyse usage patterns over time to determine DSP resource needs and optimal configuration settings. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 388 9.38.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage PC Programming Manual...
Page 389: Pbx Configuration-[2] System
Section 10 PBX Configuration—[2] System This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 390: Pbx Configuration-[2-1] System-Date & Time
10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting 10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time 10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions (e.g., PT, PS).
Page 391: Pbx Configuration-[2-1-2] System-Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be programmed. Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol).
Page 392 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Note If KX-UT series SIP phones are connected to the PBX, and this setting is changed, they must be restarted for the new time zone setting to take effect. Value Range -14:00–+14:00 Feature Guide References 5.5.5 Automatic Setup...
Page 393: Pbx Configuration-[2-1-2] System-Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving-Daylight Saving
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be programmed.
Page 394 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving End Date—Year, Month, Day Specifies the end date of daylight savings time. Value Range Year: 2000–2035 Month: 1–12 Day: 1–31 PC Programming Manual References 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 5.5.5 Automatic Setup PC Programming Manual...
Page 395: Pbx Configuration-[2-2] System-Operator & Bgm
10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified. PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Page 396: Pbx Configuration-[2-3] System-Timers & Counters
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Various system timers and counters can be programmed. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled. Value Range 0–10 Feature Guide References...
Page 397 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start (s) Specifies the length of time between going off-hook and the start of automatic dialling when the Hot Line feature is set. Value Range 0–180 s Feature Guide References...
Page 398 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Dial—Analogue CO Inter-digit (s) Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the caller’s voice over the analogue trunk.
Page 399 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Recall—Transfer Recall (s) Specifies the length of time that a transferred call waits to be answered, before being redirected to the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the original transferring extension. Value Range 1–240 s PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings...
Page 400 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 1–15 s Feature Guide References 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) 2.10 Busy Line/Busy Party Features Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset (s) Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard when using a PT handset. The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires.
Page 401 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering (s) Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line. Value Range 0.0–12.0 s PC Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer (s)
Page 402 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 0–60 s PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing...
Page 403 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time (x60s) Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line is prolonged each time that the caller prolongs the call. (Selecting "0" prevents the caller from prolonging the trunk-to-trunk call.) Value Range 60 ´...
Page 404 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–15) s PC Programming Manual References 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call Doorphone—Call Duration (x10s) Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected. Value Range 10 ´...
Page 405 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Timed Reminder—Interval Time (x10s) Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms. Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–120) s Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration (x10s) Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings. Value Range 10 ´...
Page 406 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 0–240 s Feature Guide References 2.14.2 Conference Miscellaneous Caller ID—Waiting to receive (s) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analogue trunk. If the Caller ID is received through an analogue trunk card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through a port to which Caller ID Detection is disabled, this timer is not applicable.
Page 407 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.7.5 Walking COS 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry 2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) External Sensor—Ring Duration (s) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer before cancelling a sensor call. Value Range 10 ´...
Page 408 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode (s) Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to idle status. Value Range 1–15 s Air Synchronisation—Watching Degeneracy (x60s) Specifies the length of time that a Slave CS can maintain an ongoing call after air synchronisation is lost.
Page 409 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Feature Guide References 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer (s) When the destination of an incoming call is a PS, specifies the length of time the PBX searches for the PS before setting its status to Out of Range.
Page 410 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters 12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Conference Group Call—Ring Duration (s) Specifies the length of time that a conference group call will ring. The conference group call will be established with members who answer within this time.
Page 411: Pbx Configuration-[2-4] System-Week Table
10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the Time Service Switching Mode option.
Page 412 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 5.1.3 Tenant Service 5.1.4 Time Service 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Hour, Minute Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting is set to Enable.
Page 413: Pbx Configuration-[2-5] System-Holiday Table
10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list. The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed. You can click the UM Holiday Table tab to open the Holiday Table used for features of the Unified Messaging system.
Page 414 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Holiday Table—End Date—Month Specifies the month of the holiday end date. Value Range 1–12 PC Programming Manual References 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table— End Date (Month Day) Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Holiday Table—End Date—Day Specifies the day of the holiday end date.
Page 415: Pbx Configuration-[2-6] System-Numbering Plan
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main 10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering Plan 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, and numbers to access other PBXs in a network can be programmed here. For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature Guide.
Page 416: Trunk Group Access
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main No. of Additional Digits Specifies the number of additional digits following the leading number. Value Range None: 0 digit X: 1 digit XX: 2 digits Features Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a dial tone.
Page 417 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings TIE Line Access Specifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Guide References...
Page 418: Doorphone Call
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System DOORPHONE Call Specifies the feature number used to make a call to a doorphone. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call...
Page 419: Single Co Line Access
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main OGM Record / Clear / Playback Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to record, clear, or play back a certain OGM. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—...
Page 420: Directed Call Pickup
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain extension. Value Range Max.
Page 421: Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Feature Guide References 2.17.1 Paging Automatic Callback Busy Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel Automatic Callback Busy. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code...
Page 422: Account Code Entry
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Account Code Entry Specifies the feature number used to enter an Account Code. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve Specifies the feature number used to hold a call or retrieve a call on hold from the holding extension.
Page 423: Door Open
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.13.1 Call Hold Door Open Specifies the feature number used to open a door. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Guide References 2.18.2 Door Open External Relay Access...
Page 424 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension ISDN Hold Specifies the feature number used to hold a call using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature. Value Range Max.
Page 425 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) 4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension Specifies the feature number used to send either the CLIP number of the trunk in use (subscriber’s number) or the extension to the network.
Page 426 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Message Waiting, or call back the caller. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 2.20.1 Message Waiting FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO &...
Page 427 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features FWD No Answer Timer Set Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded. Value Range Max.
Page 428: Walking Extension
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group.
Page 429: Manual Call Waiting For Extension Call
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 2.24.3 Walking Extension Features Data Line Security Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security (i.e., preventing signals from other extensions during data transmission).
Page 430: Incoming Call Queue Monitor
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy Override 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy Override Deny Feature Guide References 2.10.2 Executive Busy Override Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off Specifies the feature number used to enter or leave Not Ready mode.
Page 431 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set/cancel the Hot Line feature, or programme the number to be automatically dialled. Value Range Max.
Page 432 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder. Value Range Max.
Page 433: Extension Feature Clear
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Time Service Switch 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Remote Extension Dial Lock Off Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to unlock other extensions using the...
Page 434 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear Extension PIN Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set a PIN for an extension. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) Dial Information (CTI)
Page 435: Busy Out Cancel
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Guide References 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Busy Out Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel the Busy Out status of an analogue trunk. Value Range Max.
Page 436 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Leading Number Feature Guide References 4.3.1 TIE Line Service KX-T7710 The settings of the MESSAGE key and One-touch keys on the KX-T7710 can be programmed. Note •...
Page 437 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main This is available only when the position of the Mode switch lever on the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX". Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) PC Programming Manual...
Page 438: Pbx Configuration-[2-6-2] System-Numbering Plan-Quick Dial
10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks"...
Page 439 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Feature Guide References 2.6.5 Quick Dialling 4.3.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network 5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering PC Programming Manual...
Page 440: Pbx Configuration-[2-6-3] System-Numbering Plan-B/Na Dnd Call Feature
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/ NA DND Call Feature Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number. For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering"...
Page 441 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving method to ring tone or voice. Value Range 1 digit (0–9, *, or #) Feature Guide References 2.5.3 Intercom Call Message Waiting Set...
Page 442 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2 Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an extension in DND mode. This is the same setting as BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override on this screen, and can be used to provide two methods of activating the specified features.
Page 443: Pbx Configuration-[2-7] System-Class Of Service
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of Service 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum of 64 COS levels can be programmed.
Page 444 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings TRS Level on Extension Lock Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial Lock feature. Value Range 1: Allows all trunk calls 2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7: Restricts all trunk calls PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 445: Transfer To Co
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit Enables the extension-to-trunk call duration feature. The maximum call duration can be set using Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s) on 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings.
Page 446: Account Code Mode
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Account Code Mode Specifies whether the entry of an account code is optional or mandatory when making a trunk call. Value Range Option, Forced PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 447: Dnd Override
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Assistant COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Call Pickup by DSS Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References...
Page 448 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.10.4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA Transfer to busy Extension w/o BSS Operation Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy.
Page 449: Executive Busy Override
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Call Monitor Enables listening to a busy extension’s conversation. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.10.3 Call Monitor Executive Busy Override...
Page 450 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Manager COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Group Forward Set Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group. Value Range Disable: An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group.
Page 451 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Manager Specifies the authorisation to use manager features. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 5.1.6 Manager Features Time Service Switch Enables manual switching of time modes.
Page 452 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings SDN Key Mode Selects what happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook. Value Range Enhanced DSS: The registered (owner) extension is called. Standard SDN: A dial tone is heard. Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Making call by COS of SDN key’s owner...
Page 453: Door Unlock
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Door Unlock Enables using the door opener feature. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.18.2 Door Open External Relay Access Enables access to external relays.
Page 454 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Allow, Deny PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.7.5 Walking COS Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS.
Page 455 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant) CA ICD Group Log Out Enables logging out of ICD groups when using Communication Assistant (CA) Client. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CA— CA Chat Feature Guide References 2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)
Page 456 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Accept a collect call (for Brazil) Enables accepting collect calls. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual...
Page 457: Pbx Configuration-[2-7-2] System-Class Of Service-External Call Block
10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode (day/ lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list. Outgoing Trunk Group 1–64 Specifies the available trunk groups.
Page 458: Pbx Configuration-[2-7-3] System-Class Of Service-Internal Call Block
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.
Page 459: Pbx Configuration-[2-8] System-Ring Tone Patterns
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the calls are received on.
Page 460: Pbx Configuration-[2-8-2] System-Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Doorphone
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Page 461: Pbx Configuration-[2-8-3] System-Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Others
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Page 462 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Live Call Screening—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8 Specifies the ring tone pattern for LCS warning tones. Value Range Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2 PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—...
Page 463: Pbx Configuration-[2-9] System-System Options
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Various system settings can be programmed. Option 1 PT LCD—Date Display Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions. Value Range Date-Month, Month-Date PT LCD—Time Display Selects the time format shown on the displays of extensions.
Page 464 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY 2.21.3 LED Indication PT Fwd / DND—DND LED Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the DND feature is activated. Value Range On (Solid): Red on Flash: Slow red flashing PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND...
Page 465 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Feature Guide References 2.17.1 Paging PT Fwd / DND—Extension Status of Mobile Integration (FWD NA to CO) Specifies whether an extension is shown as idle or busy when it forwards a call to a trunk on no answer. Value Range Idle, Busy PC Programming Manual References...
Page 466 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PT Operation—One-touch Busy Override by SCO key Specifies whether calls in progress can be joined (Executive Busy Override) simply by pressing the S-CO button. Value Range Enable, Disable Feature Guide References 2.10.2 Executive Busy Override PT Operation—JOG Dial Speed Selects the speed at which items scroll on the display when the Jog Dial is used.
Page 467 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.13.1 Call Hold PT Operation—Hold key mode Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without Announcement feature.
Page 468 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear CODEC—System CODEC Selects the codec type for PSs. Value Range A-Law, Mu-Law CODEC—Network CODEC Selects the codec type for ISDN lines. Value Range A-Law, Mu-Law CODEC—Priority Notification from SIP Network (for Incoming Call) Specifies whether the priority notification from the SIP network is used in place of the PBX’s codec priority for SIP trunks.
Page 469 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration (x10s) Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial Redial—Automatic Redial for Analogue CO Selects whether Automatic Redial to an analogue trunk is performed when the called party does not answer within a pre-programmed time period.
Page 470 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call Selects whether the time limit for extension-to-trunk calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing and incoming calls. COS determines the use of this feature, and the length of the time limit can be assigned on a trunk group basis.
Page 471 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, or paging.
Page 472 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.14.2 Conference 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension when a party leaves a conference call.
Page 473 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.25.1 Dial Tone Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS Selects the dial tone the PBX (instead of the network) sends to the caller when a call is made using the ARS feature, or ISDN En Bloc dialling. Value Range Type A, Type B PC Programming Manual References...
Page 474 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options If set to "Disable", echo cancelling is not used for extension-to-ISDN line calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Option 4 DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call Enables the use of a DSS button to pick up an incoming call to another extension or an ICD group. Value Range On or Flash, Off Feature Guide References...
Page 475 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable: The PBX disconnects the current call, and calls the extension assigned to the DSS or SDN button. Enable: The PBX places the current call on consultation hold. Feature Guide References 2.12.1 Call Transfer DSS Key—Caller Information Display before Call Pick-up Specifies whether incoming caller information is displayed after pressing the DSS button when a call is ringing at the designated extension, instead of answering the call.
Page 476 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of Held Party) Enables the transfer of related CLIP information when a party on hold is transferred. When set to "Enable", the transfer destination will receive the original caller’s CLIP information, not the information of the extension that performed the transfer.
Page 477: Walking Cos
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer Feature Guide References 4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD Selects whether call information (such as Caller ID) is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS (i.e., a PS with one or more PDN buttons) when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.
Page 478 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Option 5 SLT—SLT Hold Mode Selects how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT. For details of each mode, see "2.13.1 Call Hold" in the Feature Guide. Value Range Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4 Feature Guide References 2.13.1 Call Hold SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern...
Page 479 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out ISDN Voice Path Connection—Connect when "Alert" is sent from ISDN Enables the voice path of an ISDN line to connect even when an "Alert" signal is received from the telephone company.
Page 480 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Option 6 (CTI) Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for First Party Call Control CTI such as Communication Assistant (CA). Value Range 0–60 s Feature Guide References...
Page 481 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 3rd Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR is retried when no response is received, for Third Party Call Control CTI. Value Range 0–60 s Feature Guide References 2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) 3rd Party CTI—CDR retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check of CDR is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI.
Page 482 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log Incoming Call Log—Fwd All/Fwd Busy Specifies whether the following types of calls are recorded in the incoming call log of the original destination. • Calls rerouted via the FWD—All Calls feature. •...
Page 483 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Option 8 P2P Group—Priority Voice 1/Priority Voice 2/Priority Voice 3 Specifies the order of priority of the codecs to use for P2P groups. Value Range Priority Voice 1: G.729, G.711, G.722 Priority Voice 2/Priority Voice 3: G.729, G.711, G.722, None Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection P2P Group—Video Conference...
Page 484 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Option 9 Extension / Mailbox Setting—Mailbox Number Synchronization with Extension Number Enables the synchronisation of Mailbox Number and Extension Number settings. Value Range Enable, Disable PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Number 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 485 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.24.3 Walking Extension Features 2.24.3.1 Walking Extension 2.24.3.3 Walking Extension-Home position control PC Programming Manual...
Page 486: Pbx Configuration-[2-10] System-Extension Cid Settings
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed. Extension Caller ID Modulation Type Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore) Feature Guide References...
Page 487: Caller Id Signal Type
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Caller ID Signal Type Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT (reference only). Value Range Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID Enables the PBX to automatically add a Trunk Access number to the received telephone number when sending the Caller ID number of an incoming trunk call to an SLT.
Page 488 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID FSK Transmission Level (for MCSLC Card) Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation for MCSLC cards. Value Range -14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 dB, 0 dB Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual...
Page 489: Pbx Configuration-[2-11] System-Audio Gain
10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH 10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio Gain 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed. Paging—EPG 1-6 (External Pager 1-6) Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1. Value Range -15.5–15.5 dB PC Programming Manual References...
Page 490 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Feature Guide References 2.13.4 Music on Hold 2.30.1 Background Music (BGM) External MOH—MOH 3–8 (Music on Hold 3–8) Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1-6 (MOH 3-8). Value Range -31.5–31.5 dB PC Programming Manual References 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator &...
Page 491: Pbx Configuration-[2-11-2] System-Audio Gain-Card
10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card. Up Gain (To PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX. Value Range -31.5–31.5 dB Down Gain (From PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card.
Page 492 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card PC Programming Manual...
Page 493: Pbx Configuration-[3] Group
Section 11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Group menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 494: Pbx Configuration-[3-1] Group-Trunk Group
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings 11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of a trunk group are applied to all trunks in the group. A maximum of 64 trunk groups can be programmed. For more information on trunk groups, see "5.1.2 Group"...
Page 495 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access CO-CO Duration Time (*60s) Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected. Value Range None, 1–60 (´...
Page 496 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Dialling Plan Table Specifies the table to be used for en-bloc dialling. Value Range 1–4 PC Programming Manual References 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan Tone Detection Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Page 497 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References...
Page 498: Host Pbx Access Code
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Page 499 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual References 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Mode Enables the PBX to automatically reject collect calls. This setting is only for users in Brazil. Value Range Disable, Enable Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Wait Time...
Page 500: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-2] Group-Trunk Group-Local Access Priority
11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a trunk call by Idle Line Access, the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle trunk according to the priority assigned here. Trunk Group No.
Page 501: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-3] Group-Trunk Group-Caller Id Modification
11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to pre-programmed modification tables, and then recorded for calling back. Leading Digits After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables, the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to that trunk group.
Page 502 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification PC Programming Manual References 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings— Caller ID Modification Table 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Length of Digits The PBX adds a certain number of digits to the caller’s number depending on the length of digits, as programmed in the Length of Digits Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group.
Page 503 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Added Number (for National) Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) but does not exceed Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Page 504 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification PC Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual...
Page 505: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-4] Group-Trunk Group-Dialling Plan
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits.
Page 506 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY PC Programming Manual...
Page 507: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-4] Group-Trunk Group-Dialling Plan-Auto Assign
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan 11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically. Select Auto Assigning Table Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialling plan table.
Page 508: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-5] Group-Trunk Group-Charge Rate
11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk group. Trunk Group Name Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only). Value Range Max.
Page 509: Pbx Configuration-[3-2] Group-User Group
11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and several paging groups.
Page 510: Pbx Configuration-[3-3] Group-Call Pickup Group
11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 call pickup groups can be programmed. To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.
Page 511: Pbx Configuration-[3-3] Group-Call Pickup Group-All Setting
11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups. Call Pickup Group Name Specifies the name of the call pickup group.
Page 512: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Page 513: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group-All Setting
11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Specifies the name of the paging group.
Page 514: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group-External
11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager 11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only). Value Range Max.
Page 515: Pbx Configuration-[3-5] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed.
Page 516 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution FWD Mode Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group. Value Range No Ring, Ring PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND...
Page 517: Overflow Queuing Busy
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 5.1.3 Tenant Service Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group. Depending on the COS, calls from certain extensions are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature. Also, when calls are forwarded or overflowed to a trunk, the TRS/Barring assigned for the COS of the incoming call distribution group applies.
Page 518: Overflow No Answer
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity Specifies the number of calls that can wait in a queue.
Page 519: Queuing Time Table
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature 2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature Time out & Manual Queue Redirection Overflow Time Specifies the length of time calls wait in a queue before they are redirected to the overflow destination. Value Range None, 10 ´...
Page 520: Extension No Answer Redirection Time
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range None, Table 1–Table 64 PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing Enables the PBX to play messages/BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table, when the call arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued.
Page 521 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out from the incoming call distribution group. Value Range None, 1–15 Feature Guide References 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out Maximum No.
Page 522 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.2.2.6 VIP Call Supervisor Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the incoming call distribution group’s supervisor. The supervisor can monitor and control the status of each member of the group using a 6-line display PT. The supervisor extension need not belong to the group.
Page 523 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log Group FWD Call from CO—Setting Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range Off, On Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Group FWD Call from CO—Destination Specifies the forward destination of incoming trunk calls directed to the incoming call distribution group.
Page 524: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-1] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Group Settings-Member List
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of multiple incoming call distribution groups.
Page 525 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Wrap-up Timer Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before the member extension can accept another call. This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on"...
Page 526: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-2] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Queuing Time Table
11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled. A maximum of 64 Queuing Time Tables can be programmed. Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16 Specifies the command activated by the corresponding sequence.
Page 527: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-3] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Miscellaneous
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed. Options—Call Log to ICD Group when ICD Member Answered Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.
Page 528 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Options—Longest Idle Distribution Selects whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the extension that has been idle the longest (ACD). Value Range Disable (UCD), Enable (ACD) Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Options—Wrap-up Timer based on...
Page 529 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Note When this setting is enabled, certain hospitality features cannot be used. For details, refer to the relevant chapter in the Feature Guide. Value Range Enable (Logging), Disable Feature Guide References 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY 2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD) 2.23.2 Room Status Control 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room...
Page 530 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Options—Announcement of Estimated Waiting Time—Threshold Time for Special Announce (10-60 min) Specifies the threshold wait time for when calls waiting in an ICD group queue will hear the special announcement. Value Range 10–60 min Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Options—UM System Guidance—UM System Guidance for Queue No.
Page 531: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-4] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Acd Supervisor
11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor This screen is only available at Installer level. Description After specifying an ICD Group to be monitored, specify a User (User) or User (Administrator) as an ACD supervisor to begin monitoring.
Page 532: Pbx Configuration-[3-6] Group-Extension Hunting Group
11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a pre-programmed hunting type. If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which can be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Page 533: Pbx Configuration-[3-6] Group-Extension Hunting Group-Member List
11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the Hunting Group No. list. To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension No.
Page 534: Pbx Configuration-[3-7] Group-Um Group
11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings 11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings The Unified Messaging (UM) ports of a PBX make up a group, called a UM group. This group has a floating extension number, which can be the destination for incoming calls, redirected calls, transferred calls, etc. When a call is received at the UM group, the Unified Messaging system can direct the caller to leave a voice message or dial a number to reach the desired party.
Page 535 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings Overflow to Mailbox for Call to ICD Group Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the UM when a call is redirected from an incoming call distribution group to the UM group by Intercept Routing. When the Unified Messaging system receives the mailbox number, it answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.
Page 536: Pbx Configuration-[3-7-2] Group-Um Group-Unit Settings
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings A UM group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 537 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Feature Guide References 2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration 4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail Group Name Specifies the name of the centralised VM (DPT) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM (DPT) group.
Page 538: Pbx Configuration-[3-7-2] Group-Um Group-Unit Settings-Member List
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings 11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information about all UM ports that belong to the selected UM group. Indicates the UM port number (reference only). Value Range 1–24 PC Programming Manual References 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Extension No.
Page 539: Pbx Configuration-[3-8] Group-Ps Ring Group
11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 128 PS extensions.
Page 540: Pbx Configuration-[3-8] Group-Ps Ring Group-Member List
11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List Each PS Ring Group can have up to 128 PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the PS Ring Group Number list. To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Page 541: Pbx Configuration-[3-9] Group-Conference Group
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group A conference group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a conference group call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 conference groups.
Page 542 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group Automatic Answer w/o Extension Setting Specifies if the extensions of the conference will automatically answer a conference group call, even if Hands-free Answerback is not set for those extensions. This setting can be used with PTs and KX-TCA175/ KX-TCA275/KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/KX-TCA385 PSs.
Page 543: Pbx Configuration-[3-9] Group-Conference Group-Member List
11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to programme from the Conference Group No. list. When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
Page 544: Pbx Configuration-[3-10] Group-P2P Group
11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Settings for peer-to-peer (P2P) groups can be programmed. P2P Group Name Specifies the name of the P2P group. Value Range Max. 20 characters Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Bandwidth Control Specifies whether to use the bandwidth precedence setting of the P2P group for calling among different P2P groups.
Page 545: Pbx Configuration-[3-11] Group-Vm(Dpt) Group
Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of the PBX. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group. 2 VM (DPT) Groups can be programmed.
Page 546 11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—System Settings Overflow to Mailbox for Call to ICD Group Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VM when a call is redirected from an incoming call distribution group to the VM group by Intercept Routing. When the VPS receives the mailbox number, it answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.
Page 547: Pbx Configuration-[3-11-2] Group-Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
Page 548: Pbx Configuration-[3-11-2] Group-Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings-Member List
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) in DPT Type—Type of 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type will be displayed. In addition, the other information displayed here can also be set in 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type.
Page 549 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings PC Programming Manual References 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings Feature Guide References 2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group VM Port No. Indicates the VM port number for the port (reference only). Value Range 1-12 PC Programming Manual References 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 550 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings Feature Guide References 2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration PC Programming Manual...
Page 551: Pbx Configuration-[3-12] Group-Vm(Dtmf) Group
Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. 2 VM (DTMF) Groups can be programmed.
Page 552 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when a certain feature (e.g., Message Waiting) has been successfully set or cancelled on an extension. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause]) VM DTMF Status Signal—Disconnect Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the caller hangs up.
Page 553 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause]) Feature Guide References 2.20.1 Message Waiting VM DTMF Command—Switching to AA Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from VM Service Mode to AA Service Mode. Value Range Max.
Page 554 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Others—Call Waiting on VM Group Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DTMF) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is not sent to any VM port.) Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Others—FWD to the VPS Sequence...
Page 555: Pbx Configuration-[3-12-2] Group-Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
Page 556: Pbx Configuration-[3-12-2] Group-Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings-Member List
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings 11.12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list. To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Page 557: Pbx Configuration-[4] Extension
Section 12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Extension menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 558: Pbx Configuration-[4-1] Extension-Wired Extension
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned. To search for a specific extension, enter the extension number or the extension name in the search box and click Find Next.
Page 559: User Group
ISDN-Extension: ISDN telephone is connected. CS: CS is connected. IP-PT: IP-PT belonging to the V-IPEXT card is connected. P-SIP: Panasonic SIP Phone is connected. UT: KX-UT series SIP phone is connected. SIP: General SIP Extension is connected. S-PS: SIP Portable Station is connected.
Page 560 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX. The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: Keeping PINs secret.
Page 561 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Feature Guide References 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing Intercept No Answer Time...
Page 562 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings CLIP Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when making a trunk call.
Page 563 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) COLR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the extension on the caller’s telephone display when answering a call.
Page 564 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 1 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Wireless XDP / Shared Extension Specifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established.
Page 565 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programmed Mailbox No. Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Transfer Recall Destination Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.
Page 566 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions. Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker W-OHCA: Voice from the handset Feature Guide References 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting...
Page 567 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.6.6 Hot Line Data Mode Sets or cancels the protection against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication. Value Range Off, On Feature Guide References 2.11.5 Data Line Security Option 3 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Page 568 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings • Depending on system programming, the number of terminals may be limited to 256. For more information, consult your dealer. Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Call Pickup Executive Override Deny Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions. Value Range Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call...
Page 569 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Intercom Call by Voice Selects the method of receiving intercom calls. When Deny Voice Call is selected, the extension will always ring when receiving calls, regardless of how the caller wants to make the call. Value Range Tone Call, Voice Call, Deny Voice Call Feature Guide References...
Page 570 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call. Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected. PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected. F-1–F-84: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-84) is selected.
Page 571 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 5 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Display Language Selects the display language of the extension telephone.
Page 572 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Off, On Automatic Answer for CO Call Enables the extension to answer an incoming trunk call automatically after a certain number of rings without going off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback has been set on the extension. This setting is only effective when Forced Automatic Answer on this screen has been set to Off.
Page 573: Paging Deny
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings ICM Tone Selects the ring tone for incoming calls arriving at the INTERCOM button or PDN buttons. Note that the ring tone specified here is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension. Value Range IP-PT (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30 KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.) Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)
Page 574 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Table 1: Standard mode Table 2: Option mode Flash Mode during CO Conversation Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation. Value Range EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall Feature Guide References 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate 2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Incoming Call Log Memory...
Page 575 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Option 8 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max.
Page 576: Slt Mw Mode
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range 0–15 s Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID SLT MW Mode Enables the use of the Message Waiting Lamp on an SLT extension connected to the extension port. Value Range Disable, MW-Lamp Feature Guide References 2.20.1 Message Waiting Wrap-up Timer...
Page 577 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters PDN Delayed Ringing Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons). Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Built-in Communication Assistant...
Page 578 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters FWD Mode for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A PC Programming Manual References...
Page 579 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References...
Page 580 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Remote FWD COS Specifies the COS that allows the FWD setting on the extension to be changed from another extension. This COS must then be set for the extensions that will remotely change the FWD setting. Value Range Disable, 1–64 Feature Guide References...
Page 581: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-1] Extension-Wired Extension-Extension Settings-Clip
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
Page 582 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 583: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-2] Extension-Wired Extension-Fwd/Dnd
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy the FWD/DND settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.
Page 584: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-3] Extension-Wired Extension-Speed Dial
12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for each extension.
Page 585: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-4] Extension-Wired Extension-Flexible Button
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Overview Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 84 flexible buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Page 586 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Notice For each KX-UT series SIP phone that is connected to the PBX, at least one DN button must be assigned to the extension. Without a DN button assigned, the extension will not be able to make or receive calls. PC Programming Manual References 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
Page 587 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out Parameter Selection (for Time Service) Selects which time modes are switched manually. Value Range All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.
Page 588 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Number (for ICD Group) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Number (for Message Waiting) Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked.
Page 589 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Extension Number (for Call Log) Specifies the extension’s own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed.
Page 590 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Feature Guide References 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox. Value Range Max.
Page 591 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Dial (for ISDN Service) Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Feature Guide References 4.1.2.11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Dial (for NDSS)
Page 592 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN) Specifies the ring tone type. Value Range IP-PT (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30 KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.) S-PS: Not available.
Page 593: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-4] Extension-Wired Extension-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be selected.
Page 594: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-5] Extension-Wired Extension-Pf Button
12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Page 595: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-6] Extension-Wired Extension-Ndss Link Data - Send
12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 596: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-7] Extension-Wired Extension-Clip Id Table
12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wired extension. Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the extension (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Page 597: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-8] Extension-Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message
12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message 12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each extension. This screen allows you to specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
Page 598 12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name Simplified Voice Message Specifies whether to enable the Simplified Voice Message feature. Value Range Enable, Disable Maximum SVM Log Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for the extension.
Page 599: Pbx Configuration-[4-2] Extension-Portable Station
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings 12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 128 PSs can be programmed. To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/DND and flexible button settings.
Page 600 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range 1–32 Feature Guide References 5.1.2 Group 5.1.3 Tenant Service Specifies the COS of the PS. Value Range 1–64 PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Extension PIN Specifies the PIN of the PS.
Page 601 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Intercept Destination Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS.
Page 602 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing Intercept No Answer Time Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.
Page 603 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual References 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 604 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) COLR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller’s telephone display when answering a call.
Page 605 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 1 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS.
Page 606 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Feature Guide References 2.12.1 Call Transfer ARS Itemised Code Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS for accounting and billing purposes.
Page 607 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker Feature Guide References 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting Automatic C. Waiting Specifies whether to receive call waiting notification for a call from trunk, a doorphone call or a call via an incoming call distribution group.
Page 608 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 3 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS.
Page 609 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 16 characters Feature Guide References 2.20.2 Absent Message Charge Limit Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the PS. When this limit is reached, the PS cannot be used to make further trunk calls. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &...
Page 610 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Outgoing Preferred Line Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call. Value Range No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups. ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
Page 611 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings LCS Recording Mode Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS’s mailbox when the PS user answers a call that was being monitored. Value Range Stop Record, Keep Record Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview Option 5 Extension Number...
Page 612 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information Option 6...
Page 613: Svm Lock
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings SVM Lock Selects whether Simplified Voice Message Log information can be displayed at the extension or other extensions. Value Range Unlock, Lock Feature Guide References 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log Option 7 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max.
Page 614 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate 2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the PS’s Incoming Call Log memory. Value Range 0–100 Feature Guide References 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log Memory...
Page 615 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual References 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call) Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
Page 616 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual References 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name PDN Delayed Ringing Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons). Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings Feature Guide References...
Page 617 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings FWD / DND Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and DND settings can be programmed separately for each PS in 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND.
Page 618 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A PC Programming Manual References 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND...
Page 619 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Keep ring after FWD NA to CO Specifies whether a PS continues to ring after forwarding an incoming call to an outside destination via FWD N/A or FWD Busy N/A. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References...
Page 620: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-1] Extension-Portable Station-Extension Settings-Clip Generate
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings 12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
Page 621 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 622: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-2] Extension-Portable Station-Fwd/Dnd
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy FWD/DND values from one location to another, click Copy to.
Page 623: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-3] Extension-Portable Station-Flexible Button
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12 flexible buttons can be customised for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
Page 624 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.13.2 Call Park Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to are logged in to or logged out from. Value Range None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually. All: All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to.
Page 625 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Parameter Selection (for SDN) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. The value specified here is only used when System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD on 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options is set to "Enable". Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring PC Programming Manual References...
Page 626 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or the extension number to set FWD remotely whose trunk calls will be forwarded. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Feature Guide References 2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Page 627 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox. Value Range Max.
Page 628 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Feature Guide References 2.6.2 One-touch Dialling Dial (for ISDN Service) Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service. Value Range Max.
Page 629 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.13.2 Call Park Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Page 630: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-3] Extension-Portable Station-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button 12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To select all PSs at once, click Select All.
Page 631: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-4] Extension-Portable Station-Ndss Link Data - Send
12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send 12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 632: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-5] Extension-Portable Station-Clip Id Table
12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wireless extension. Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Name Indicates the name of the PS (reference only).
Page 633: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-6] Extension-Portable Station-Simplified Voice Message
12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message 12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each PS. This screen allows you to specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
Page 634 12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message Value Range 0–100 Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) PC Programming Manual...
Page 635: Pbx Configuration-[4-3] Extension-Dss Console
12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 8 DSS Consoles can be programmed. The DPT Type—Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type.
Page 636 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Value Range 1–64 Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone. Value Range Automatic, Specific Feature Guide References...
Page 637 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension. Value Range Feature Guide References 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Page 638 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range Max.
Page 639 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Number (for Hurry-up) Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection). Value Range Max.
Page 640 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Extension Number (for SDN) Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to the SDN button. Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function. Value Range Max.
Page 641 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Feature Guide References 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Value Range Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO,...
Page 642: Pbx Configuration-[4-3] Extension-Dss Console-Dss Key Data Copy
12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS key data copy 12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS key data copy The flexible DSS button settings (including key label settings) of a DSS Console can be copied to different DSS Consoles. Select the DSS Console that has the setting to copy to other DSS Consoles from the DSS Console No./Pair Extension list, then click Copy to.
Page 643: Pbx Configuration-[5] Optional Device
Section 13 PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Optional Device menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 644: Pbx Configuration-[5-1] Optional Device-Doorphone
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed. To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 645 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Value Range 1–8 PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call 5.1.3 Tenant Service Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make trunk calls, and sets restrictions on intercom calls from certain extensions (Internal Call Block).
Page 646 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Value Range 1–48 PC Programming Manual...
Page 647: Pbx Configuration-[5-2] Optional Device-External
13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager Settings for the external pager (external speaker) can be specified. Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View). Indicates the external pager ID (reference only).
Page 648: Pbx Configuration-[5-3] Optional Device-Voice Message
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System 13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—Voice Message 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller were using an SLT extension of the PBX. For more information on DISA, see "2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)"...
Page 649 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Value Range to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Busy Tone) DISA Intercept—Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers Selects how DISA calls are handled if the caller does not select any option from the menu. Value Range to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Reorder Tone) CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO...
Page 650 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Enable (Get DISA): Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to detect the end of the call. PC Programming Manual References 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network...
Page 651 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Value Range Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX receives is fixed to 4 times in the ranges of: = 100–1300 ms, 90 ms, 90 ms Option: The tone pattern that the PBX receives is optional as specified in DISA Cyclic Tone Option on this...
Page 652 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder PC Programming Manual...
Page 653: Pbx Configuration-[5-3-2] Optional Device-Voice Message-Disa Message
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 654 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Value Range None, 1–64 PC Programming Manual References 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Fax Extension Specifies the extension number to which to transfer a call when a fax signal is detected. Value Range Max.
Page 655: Pbx Configuration-[5-3-3] Optional Device-Voice Message-Svm
13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice Message—SVM 13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice Message—SVM Settings related to Built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be specified. This feature can be accessed via the MPR card. SVM—Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number used to access the SVM feature. Value Range Max.
Page 656 13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice Message—SVM Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone On Maximum Time Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX. When the tone sent from the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognises it as a tone-on.
Page 657 13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice Message—SVM SLT Dial "*" Operation Mode Specifies the SLT dial "*" operation mode to avoid wrong DTMF signal detection from the SLT. If "Enable" is selected, you need to dial "*" before dialling. Value Range Enable, Disable Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Page 658: Pbx Configuration-[5-4] Optional Device-External Relay
13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay Settings related to external relays can be programmed. Before programming these settings, For Output - Device Type must be set to "Relay" in the DOORPHONE card’s property settings. (® 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE Card) The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 659 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— External Relay Access Feature Guide References 2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block 2.18.4 External Relay Control PC Programming Manual...
Page 660: Pbx Configuration-[5-5] Optional Device-External Sensor
13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Settings related to external sensors can be programmed. To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 661 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.18.3 External Sensor 5.1.3 Tenant Service Sensor Alarm—Email notification Enables e-mail notification when the sensor detects an alarm. Value Range Enable, Disable Feature Guide References 2.18.3 External Sensor 5.1.3 Tenant Service...
Page 662 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor PC Programming Manual...
Page 663: Pbx Configuration-[6] Feature
Section 14 PBX Configuration—[6] Feature This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Feature menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 664: Pbx Configuration-[6-1] Feature-System Speed Dial
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial The System Speed Dialling Table is used to store frequently dialled numbers as well as callers who should be automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI] distribution). The System Speed Dialling Table is available for all extension users when making or receiving a call.
Page 665 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 2.19.1 Caller ID CLI Destination Specifies the CLI destination (extension) to which incoming calls from the programmed telephone number are routed. If a Caller ID Modification Table is being used, the modified number must match the telephone number above (CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number) in order for the call to be routed correctly.
Page 666: Pbx Configuration-[6-2] Feature-Hotel & Charge
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set. Main Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4 Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators. Value Range Max.
Page 667 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8 Specifies the text of the message output on SMDR when this Printing Message is selected from an extension. The "%" character can be used in a message, and requires a number to be entered in its place when the message is selected from an extension.
Page 668 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Value Range Max. 12 characters Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—LCD for "Minibar" Specifies the name of charge item 2 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering room charges.
Page 669 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Others" Specifies the name of charge item 3 as printed on the guest bill. Value Range Max. 12 characters Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application—Language for Bill (SMDR) Specifies the language used for standard items shown on guest bills printed out using the Call Billing feature.
Page 670 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Charge Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%) Specifies the percentage margin to be added to telephone charges displayed on the guest bill. Value Range 0.00–99.99 % Feature Guide References 2.22.3 Call Charge Services 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Margin &...
Page 671 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code— Budget Management Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information 2.22.3 Call Charge Services 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Charge Options—Currency...
Page 672 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.22.3 Call Charge Services Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit Selects what happens when the amount of the call charge reaches the pre-programmed limit during a conversation. Value Range Alarm: Only a warning tone is heard. Alarm + Disconnect: A warning tone is heard, and then the call is disconnected.
Page 673: Pbx Configuration-[6-3] Feature-Verification Code
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in use to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters.
Page 674: Itemised Billing Code For Ars
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code COS Number Specifies the COS that applies when making a trunk call with the verification code. Value Range 1–64 PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Itemised Billing Code for ARS Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made with a verification code...
Page 675: Pbx Configuration-[6-4] Feature-Second Dial Tone
14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone 14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a pre-programmed number of pauses are inserted after the code.
Page 676: Pbx Configuration-[6-5] Feature-Absent Message
14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can select one of them.
Page 677: Pbx Configuration-[6-6] Feature-Tenant
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant A maximum of 8 tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources. To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Page 678: System Speed Dial
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant Same as System Setting: The setting specified in ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting is applied. PC Programming Manual References 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting Feature Guide References 2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 5.1.3 Tenant Service System Speed Dial Specifies which system speed dialling table is used by the tenant.
Page 679: Pbx Configuration-[7] Trs
Section 15 PBX Configuration—[7] TRS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the TRS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 680: Pbx Configuration-[7-1] Trs-Denied Code
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).
Page 681: Pbx Configuration-[7-2] Trs-Exception Code
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).
Page 682: Pbx Configuration-[7-3] Trs-Special Carrier
15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access Code is required each time a trunk call is made. By programming these Special Carrier Access Codes here, Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) can restrict or allow calls to be made by ignoring the codes and looking at the telephone number only.
Page 683: Pbx Configuration-[7-4] Trs-Emergency Dial
15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account Code—Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.
Page 684: Pbx Configuration-[7-5] Trs-Miscellaneous
15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/Barring, or switch between TRS/Barring methods. TRS Override by System Speed Dialling Enables an outgoing trunk call to override TRS/Barring when the call is made using System Speed Dialling.
Page 685 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialled after an extension user receives a trunk call. If the number of dialled digits exceeds the programmed limit, the line will be disconnected. Value Range None, 1–7 Feature Guide References...
Page 686 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous PC Programming Manual...
Page 687: Pbx Configuration-[8] Ars
Section 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the ARS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 688: Pbx Configuration-[8-1] Ars-System Setting
16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.
Page 689: Pbx Configuration-[8-2] Ars-Leading Number
16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
Page 690: Pbx Configuration-[8-3] Ars-Routing Plan Time
16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time 16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There are 48 Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.
Page 691: Pbx Configuration-[8-3] Ars-Routing Plan Time-Time Setting
16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting 16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins. Time-A–D—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.
Page 692: Pbx Configuration-[8-4] Ars-Routing Plan Priority
16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority 16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of each day of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab.
Page 693: Pbx Configuration-[8-5] Ars-Carrier
16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Carrier It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A maximum of 48 different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature. Carrier Name Specifies the carrier name.
Page 694 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Feature Guide References 2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Carrier Access Code Specifies the carrier access code. The carrier access code can be added to the user-dialled number by specifying "C" in Modify Command on this screen. Value Range Max.
Page 695 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Authorisation Code for Tenant—Tenant 1–Tenant 8 Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 5.1.3 Tenant Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 696: Pbx Configuration-[8-6] Ars-Leading Number Exception
16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception 16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access method if ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting is "on".
Page 697: Pbx Configuration-[8-7] Ars-Authorisation Code For Trg
16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG 16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG An Authorisation code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorisation codes entered here can be added to user-dialled numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the Carrier tab of screen 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier.
Page 698 16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG PC Programming Manual...
Page 699: Pbx Configuration-[9] Private Network
Section 17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Private Network menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 700: Pbx Configuration-[9-1] Private Network-Tie Table
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
Page 701: Trunk Group
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits for each priority. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause]) Feature Guide References 4.3.1 TIE Line Service Trunk Group...
Page 702: Pbx Configuration-[9-2] Private Network-Network Data Transmission
17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting notifications over a network of PBXs can be programmed. Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a Network DSS (NDSS) button.
Page 703 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)— IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF data to Network Operator Feature Guide References 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data Transmission Counter Specifies the maximum number of "hops", or transmissions between two PBXs, before a packet of BLF data...
Page 704 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission PC Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required) Feature Guide References 4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Timer Specifies the length of time between repeated re-transmission of network message waiting notifications.
Page 705: Pbx Configuration-[9-3] Private Network-Network Operator (Voip)
17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) This screen allows network operators to be programmed. A network operator is an extension at a remote PBX that will monitor other PBX extensions using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). The settings on this screen should be programmed at the PBX that is to be monitored ( Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID 2–8).
Page 706: Pbx Configuration-[9-4] Private Network-Ndss Key Table
17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an extension, the extension must be registered here first.
Page 707 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table Feature Guide References 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) PC Programming Manual...
Page 708: Pbx Configuration-[9-5] Private Network-Centralised Um/Vm Unit
17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit 17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit View and programme settings for using the Unified Messaging system and VPSs in a private network. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 709: Pbx Configuration-[10] Co & Incoming Call
Section 18 PBX Configuration—[10] CO & Incoming Call This section serves as reference operating instructions for the CO & Incoming Call menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 710: Pbx Configuration-[10-1] Co & Incoming Call-Co Line Settings
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 64 trunk groups. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 711: Pbx Configuration-[10-2] Co & Incoming Call-Dil Table & Port Settings
18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each trunk as the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations.
Page 712 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the DIL destination in each time mode. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References...
Page 713 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings VM Trunk Group No. Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the incoming call destination is the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) Group. The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
Page 714 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) 2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution DDI / DID / TIE / MSN...
Page 715 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Value Range DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls Feature Guide References 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Page 716: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi / Did Table
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table.
Page 717 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 4.3.1 TIE Line Service Tenant Number...
Page 718 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Value Range 1–48 CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution...
Page 719: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi / Did Table-Automatic Registration
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/ break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Page 720 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the number of the DDI/DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed. If the same destination is to be used for all locations for a certain time mode, click the appropriate Same all check box.
Page 721: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi / Did Table-Name Generate
18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Page 722 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate Name Prefix Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DDI/DID name. Value Range Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual References 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Name Suffix...
Page 723: Pbx Configuration-[10-4] Co & Incoming Call-Msn Table
18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can be distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/ break/night).
Page 724 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day.
Page 725 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service CLI for MSN When CLI distribution is enabled for an ISDN-BRI line to which MSN distribution is set, incoming trunk calls will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the MSN destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table.
Page 726: Pbx Configuration-[10-5] Co & Incoming Call-Miscellaneous
18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination. Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.) Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.
Page 727: Pbx Configuration-[11] Maintenance
Section 19 PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Maintenance menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 728: Pbx Configuration-[11-1] Maintenance-Main
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main SMDR Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and outgoing calls. SMDR Format—Type Selects the format of SMDR output. Value Range Type A: 80 digits without call charge information Type B: 80 digits with call charge information Type C: 120 digits Feature Guide References...
Page 729 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Format—Date Format Selects the printed date format. Value Range MM-DD-YY, DD-MM-YY, YY-MM-DD, YY-DD-MM Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Format—Time Format (12H / 24H) Selects whether times are displayed using the 12- or 24-hour format.
Page 730 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Print Information—Intercom Call Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing intercom calls are printed. Value Range No Print, Print Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Print Information—Log-in / Log-out Specifies whether the log-in/log-out status is printed.
Page 731 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Print Information—Error Log Specifies whether PBX error log information is output to SMDR. Value Range No Print, Print Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Page 732 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Value Range None, Number, Name, Name + Number Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Option—Secret Dial Selects the printing format of calls with a secret dial. The secret dial conceals all or part of the dialled number. Note that selecting Dial before ARS Modification in Option—ARS Dial on this screen indicates the dialled numbers as dots regardless of this setting.
Page 733 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Option—Condition Code "AN" Specifies whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is printed. Value Range No Print, Print Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Option—Caller ID Modification Specifies whether Caller ID numbers are recorded on SMDR as received (before being modified by the PBX) or after being modified.
Page 734 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main LAN—SMDR Password Specifies the password used to output the SMDR data via the LAN. Value Range Max. 10 characters Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) LAN—New Line Code for Telnet Specifies the new line code for a terminal emulator. If the terminal emulator automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return).
Page 735 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Value Range 0–23 Feature Guide References 5.6.4 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Minute Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time. Value Range 0–59 Feature Guide References 5.6.4 Local Alarm Information Error Log for UM Port Busy—Detection of All UM Port Busy Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if UM ports were all busy specified in Detection of All UM Port Busy.
Page 736 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required) 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission— Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter Feature Guide References 4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)
Page 737 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 5.5.2 PC Programming Remote—Remote Programming Enables system programming, diagnosis, and data upload from a remote location. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 5.5.2 PC Programming Remote—Password Lock Counter for Remote Programming Specifies the number of successive incorrect password entries allowed before remote access is locked. Value Range None, 1–15 Feature Guide References...
Page 738 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 5.5.2 PC Programming System Password - PT Programming—Prog *#: Administrator Level Specifies the System password to authorise the PT user to access User Level programming. Value Range 4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 5.5.2 PC Programming Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1...
Page 739: Pbx Configuration-[11-2] Maintenance-Pt Programming Access
19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—PT Programming Access 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—PT Programming Access The programming items accessible at User and Administrator level can be specified. 100 programming item numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab. Program Number Indicates the programming item number (reference only).
Page 740: Pbx Configuration-[11-3] Maintenance-Cs Synchronisation
19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation 19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation You can programme and view settings for Air Synchronisation Groups. Select an Air Synchronisation Group (1-4) to programme from the Air Synchronisation Group Number drop-down list.
Page 741 19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation Value Range Max. 20 characters Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 742 19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation Primary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the primary CS (reference only). Value Range Port number Primary CS—CS Name Indicates the name of the primary CS (reference only). Value Range Max. 20 characters Secondary CS—Index Specifies the number of the secondary CS.
Page 743: Pbx Configuration-[11-3-2] Maintenance-Cs Synchronisation-Lan Synchronisation
19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation 19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation You can programme and view settings for LAN Synchronisation Groups. Select a LAN Synchronisation Group (1-4) to programme from the LAN Synchronisation Group Number drop-down list. It is possible to synchronise CSs with each other within the LAN synchronisation group. Click Sort to reorder CSs.
Page 744 19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation IP Address for Group Control Specifies the IP address for the group. This is the same value specified in Group Control Setting—IP Address for Group Control in 19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting. Value Range 239.0.0.0–239.255.255.255 Index...
Page 745 19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the IP-CS (reference only). Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the IP-CS (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 PC Programming Manual...
Page 746: Pbx Configuration-[11-3-3] Maintenance-Cs Synchronisation-Lan Sync Group Setting
19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting 19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting You can programme the settings for a LAN synchronisation group. LAN Synchronisation Group Number Select the LAN synchronisation group to programme. Value Range 1–4 Group Control Setting—Type of Control Packet Select the method for performing LAN synchronisation.
Page 747 19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting Synchronisation Level Setting—Level of Synchronisations Lost and Restart (ns) Specifies the level at which re-synchronisation is performed. Value Range 0–32768 ns Synchronisation Monitoring Report Setting—Long Term Diagnosis Monitoring timer (h) Specifies the number of hours between performing in-operation monitoring (long term). Value Range 2–168 hours PC Programming Manual...
Page 748 19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting PC Programming Manual...
Page 749: Um Configuration-[1] Mailbox Settings
Section 20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Mailbox Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 750: Um Configuration-[1] Mailbox Settings
20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings A maximum of 500 subscriber mailboxes can be created. Although the System Manager can use a telephone to create or edit mailboxes, the System Administrator can create several mailboxes at once using Web Maintenance Console.
Page 751 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview 3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.17 Mailbox Extension Specifies the extension number of the mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid extension number including an Extension Group number can be assigned. Note If an Extension Group number is assigned to a mailbox, all group members are able to access the messages stored in the mailbox.
Page 752: Um Configuration-[1-2] Mailbox Settings-Full Setting
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Mailbox Number Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox number. The maximum number of digits that can be used for mailbox numbers is set in 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Mailbox— Mailbox No.
Page 753 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual References 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service— Directory Listing Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name Last Name Specifies the last name of the subscriber. If there are non-alphabetical characters in the first 4 letters of the first name, the mailbox is not included in the directory.
Page 754 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Mailbox Password (Message Client) Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox when using a client software programme. If a default password is programmed by an administrator, that password will be assigned automatically when creating all mailboxes.
Page 755 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Covering Extension Forwards calls to a second extension when the first extension’s subscriber is not available to take the call. The Covering Extension is one of the Incomplete Call Handling options that can be enabled or disabled by the subscriber.
Page 756 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Note This sequence has higher priority than the alternate extension transfer sequence specified in 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—PBX Parameters— Environment—Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]). Value Range System, Other Note...
Page 757 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range System, Other (If "Other" is selected, specify 10–60 s) PC Programming Manual References 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification— Dialling Parameters—Call Transfer No Answer Time (10-60 s) Call Transfer Status Determines how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when it reaches the subscriber’s extension. Click Edit for the extension to change, programme the settings, and click OK to finish.
Page 758 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when the extension is busy. Click Edit for the extension to change, programme the settings, and click OK to finish. Note •...
Page 759 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Telephone Device Specifies the Message Waiting Notification schedule for each device. The following parameters can be specified for devices 1, 2, and 3. Click Edit for the extension to change, set Device Notification for Unreceived Message to "Yes", and programme the settings, then click OK to finish.
Page 760 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Busy Delay Time (min) Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before retrying message notification when the called device is busy. Value Range 0–120 min Feature Guide References 3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device Telephone Device—Device No.
Page 761 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Interval Time between Device 1, 2, 3 and Next Device Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending Message Waiting Notification to Device 1, 2, or 3 before sending notification to the next device.
Page 762 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Yes, No Feature Guide References 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order Specifies the format of the title of the notification. Value Range Title-ID-Name, Title-Name-ID, ID-Title-Name, Name-Title-ID, ID-Name-Title, Name-ID-Title Feature Guide References 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No.
Page 763 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Voice File Specifies whether to attach a voice file of the voice message to the notification e-mail. Value Range Yes, No Feature Guide References 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No.
Page 764 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting External Message Delivery Prompt Mode When an external message is delivered, the receiver will be greeted by the system in the specified language. If set to "Primary", the default language will be used. If set to "Selective", the receiver has a choice of prompts. See related explanation in 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group—...
Page 765 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Auto Forwarding Delay Time Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the system waits before forwarding unplayed messages. The maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 min. Note The delay time must be shorter than the New Message Retention Time, or else messages will be deleted before being forwarded.
Page 766 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Auto Forwarding Expires Specifies the date and time of day for when forwarding of messages will expire. Value Range Date and time Feature Guide References 3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding Personal Custom Service Specifies the Personal Custom Service. The System Administrator can assign an operation to each key. Note •...
Page 767 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Outside Numbers Specifies the outside telephone numbers that can be used for the "Transfer to outside (specified number)" operation in the Custom Service settings. Click OK when finished. Value Range Outside Number #1–#4: Max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , #, and special codes T: Dial Tone Detection , : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
Page 768 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.14 Group Distribution Lists List 1 Members–List 4 Members Specifies the mailbox numbers that belong to the list. Follow the steps below to edit list members. Click Edit for a List Members item. Under Subscribers To Add, click the checkbox in No.
Page 769 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Auto Login Extension When this item is set to "Enable", subscribers are able to access their mailbox directly without entering the mailbox number. Subscribers can automatically log in from their extensions, by calling from an outside telephone whose number is stored as a Caller ID number, or by dialling a telephone number assigned to a specified DID number or trunk.
Page 770 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.2 Automatic Login Auto Login DDI/DID Specifies the DDI/DID number for Automatic Login. When the Unified Messaging system receives this DDI/ DID number from the PBX, the caller (subscriber) is automatically logged in to the mailbox. Note that this number must be unique for each mailbox.
Page 771 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Disable: Disables the Toll Saver feature. DID: Toll Saver functions when the system receives the pre-programmed DID number from the PBX. Caller ID: Toll Saver functions when Caller ID information is received that matches one of the pre-programmed numbers (Caller ID 1 or 2).
Page 772 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Subscriber Service - All Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of all messages in their mailbox when the subscriber logs in. Value Range Yes, No Subscriber Service - New Voice Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new voice messages in their mailbox when the subscriber logs in.
Page 773 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Yes, No Message Client Display Language Specifies the language of information generated by the UM system for the mail (IMAP) client. Value Range English, French, German, Italian, Dutch, Spanish, Portuguese, Russian Quick Menu and Greeting Recording Quick Menu and Greeting Recording When this setting is enabled for the Message Manager mailbox, the following features are enabled for the Message Manager to access greeting and recording management menus quickly.
Page 774: Um Configuration-[1-3] Mailbox Settings-Auto Configuration
20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration 20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration Auto Configuration automatically associates extension numbers and mailboxes in bulk. This feature is available at the Installer level only. Select the following options Specifies Auto configuration mode from the following. Note In Re-create all mailboxes mode, all voice data is deleted, including data that is recorded in mailboxes.
Page 775: Um Configuration-[2] Class Of Service
Section 21 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Class of Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 776: Um Configuration-[2] Class Of Service
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Each mailbox is assigned a Class of Service (COS) that determines the set of services that are available to its subscriber. There are 66 classes. Mailboxes can be assigned to their own or to the same COS as needed. COS No.
Page 777 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Tutorial The tutorial is a series of voice prompts for setting up the mailbox that is played to subscribers when they first log in to their mailbox. This item specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service hear a normal tutorial, a simplified tutorial, or no tutorial when they first log in to their mailbox.
Page 778 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Feature Guide References 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device Desktop Messaging Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can access the contents of their mailboxes with an e-mail application using IMAP. This includes the Microsoft Outlook e-mail client plug-in.
Page 779 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Mailbox Personal Greeting Length (s) Defines the maximum length (in seconds) of Personal Greetings for subscribers in the Class of Service. Note This setting is not available for COS 65 (Message Manager) and COS 66 (System Manager). Value Range 1–360 s Feature Guide References...
Page 780 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service New Message Retention Time (Selection) Specifies if a retention time limit is applied to new messages in mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of Service. If "Unlimited" is selected, new messages will remain in the mailbox until erased by the subscriber. Value Range Unlimited, Limited New Message Retention Time (Limited) (days)
Page 781 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement (Other) Specifies the maximum number of telephone numbers that subscribers in the Class of Service can assign for the Personal Caller Name Announcement feature. Only specified if Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement (Selection) is set to "Other".
Page 782 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Message Cancel for Live Call Screening If set to "Yes", the caller’s message will be deleted when a subscriber in the Class of Service answers a call via Live Call Screening while the caller is leaving a message. Note This setting is not available for COS 66 (System Manager).
Page 783 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Auto Receipt If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service can request to receive confirmation when their message has been listened to by the message recipient. Value Range No, Yes Feature Guide References 3.2.2.1 Auto Receipt Autoplay New Message If set to "Yes", the system plays new messages automatically when subscribers in the Class of Service log into...
Page 784 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Caller ID Number Announcement Specifies whether or not the system announces the Caller ID number when a subscriber in the Class of Service plays a message left by a caller, if their name has not been recorded for the Caller Name Announcement feature.
Page 785: Call Transfer
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Two-way Recorded Message Save Mode Specifies whether two-way recording sessions are saved in the mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of Service as "old" or "new" messages. Value Range Save as Old, Save as New Feature Guide References 3.2.2.30 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer Call Transfer...
Page 786 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Notify of Transfer If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service will hear "You have a call." when they answer transferred calls. Value Range No, Yes Call Transfer to Outside If set to "Yes", the system allows calls to be transferred to a trunk via the following features: Custom Service, Caller ID Callback, Call Transfer Service, Personal Custom Service, Call-through Service.
Page 787 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Feature Guide References 3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode Personal Greeting Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change their Personal Greeting when accessing their mailbox. Note For the Personal Greeting of subscribers in a Class of Service with Hospitality mode enabled, only No Answer and Busy greetings can be set.
Page 788 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Feature Guide References 2.23.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY 3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode Erase When Check Out - Owner Name Specifies if the Owner Name of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when the subscriber’s extension is set to the "Check Out"...
Page 789: Um Configuration-[3] Um Extension / Trunk Service
Section 22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Port/Trunk Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 790: Um Configuration-[3-1] Um Extension / Trunk Service-Service Group
22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group The parameters of Service Groups determine how calls are handled throughout the day. Each Service Group (therefore each port) can have a different call service for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break). One of 5 incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, Custom Service or Transfer to Mailbox) can be assigned to each call service.
Page 791 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Note Mailbox numbers are between 2 digits and the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8). Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt Specifies the language of system prompts used by this call service. If set to "Primary", the default language which is selected from all installed languages will be used.
Page 792: Um Configuration-[3-2] Um Extension / Trunk Service-Port Assignment
22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment 22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment You can assign a Service Group created in 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group to each UM port. For each UM port number, select a Service Group number (1–64) from the Service Group drop-down list. Click OK when finished.
Page 793: Um Configuration-[4] Service Settings
Section 23 UM Configuration—[4] Service Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Service Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 794: Um Configuration-[4-1] Service Settings-Caller Id / Pin Call Routing
23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing A maximum of 200 Caller ID/PIN numbers can be assigned so that callers are automatically forwarded to a pre-programmed destination. A different destination can be set for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break). For Mode, select Caller-ID Mode or PIN Mode from the drop-down list, and then click the button to assign a routing destination.
Page 795 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing Description Specifies a name and/or description of the Caller ID number. Note When no data is specified in this parameter, the caller’s name will be automatically entered here if the caller’s name is received from the telephone company.
Page 796 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing Feature Guide References 3.2.1.35 PIN Call Routing Call Transfer for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break service Specifies the destination to which the call using an assigned PIN number is automatically forwarded. A destination can be set for each time mode.
Page 797: Um Configuration-[4-2] Service Settings-Parameters
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Automated Attendant Wait Time for First Digit (0-20 s) Specifies the length of time the system waits for the caller to dial a digit before assuming the caller cannot input a DTMF signal and therefore activates No DTMF Input Call Coverage Value Range 0–20 s...
Page 798 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters PC Programming Manual References 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References 3.2.1.34 Operator Service Operator Service—Operator’s Extension Specifies the extension number for Operator 1, 2, and 3 for the checked time setting. Note •...
Page 799 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.34 Operator Service Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode Specifies how to handle operator calls when they are not answered within the time period set in Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s). Value Range Caller Select: Allows the caller to leave a message or call another extension.
Page 800 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA) Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode If set to "Enable", callers on hold are informed of their current position in the call hold queue. Example: "One other person is waiting to connect." Value Range Enable, Disable Feature Guide References...
Page 801 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Changing the order of Alternate Extensions Select an extension and click Move up or Move down to change its order in the list. Alternate extensions will be dialled in order from top to bottom. Note Extension Groups and Logical Extensions cannot be assigned.
Page 802 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Mailbox: The caller is transferred to the designated mailbox extension. Extension: The caller is transferred to the designated extension. Feature Guide References 3.2.1.32 No DTMF Input Operation No DTMF Input Call Coverage for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break (Parameter) Specifies the transfer destination if "Mailbox"...
Page 803 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Value Range North American Standard, Australasian Standard Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name Name Directory Mode Specifies one of Last Name, First Name, or Both to be used when entering the name. Value Range Last, First, Both Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name...
Page 804: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service
23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service A Custom Service allows callers to perform specific functions by pressing dial buttons on their telephones while listening to voice guidance (Custom Service Menu). Custom Services allow callers to connect themselves to an extension, mailbox, Mailbox Group, operator, fax machine, etc., without the assistance of an operator.
Page 805 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service [From the Custom Service Diagram] Double-click the desired Custom Service icon in the diagram, or right-click on the desired icon and select Edit. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box. Click OK. Example: Setting "Menu &...
Page 806: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Menu & Transfer
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This Custom Service type guides callers to press certain buttons to connect themselves with the designated party.
Page 807 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Call Transfer Anytime Specifies the type of dialling that the system accepts during the Custom Service in addition to the single-digit Custom Service options. This setting allows callers to dial numbers to connect themselves to an extension or mailbox or enter a PIN.
Page 808 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer No DTMF Input Operation Determines how calls are handled when callers do not dial any numbers after listening to the menu message (most likely because they are using rotary telephones) The default setting is "Operator", which allows the caller to be automatically connected to an operator after the menu message plays back ("Press the desired number, or stay on the line to be connected to an operator.").
Page 809 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Example: Cancelling the setting for key [1] Clear the check box next to key [1]. Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 810: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Date Control
23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control 23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control The below parameters are set for the Date Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 time periods. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 811: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Time Control
23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control 23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control The below parameters are set for the Time Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 blocks of time during the day. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 812: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Day Control
23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control 23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for each day of the week, and for all holidays. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 813: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Password
23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password The below parameters are set for the Password Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service requires that callers enter a password, followed by "#". Each password is assigned an operation. If a password is entered correctly, the caller is handled by the password’s pre-programmed operation.
Page 814 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service No DTMF Input Operation Determines how calls are handled when callers do not dial any numbers in response to system guidance (often because they are rotary telephone users). The default setting is "Operator", which allows the caller to be automatically connected to an operator after the message is played.
Page 815 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 816: Um Configuration-[4-4] Service Settings-Holiday Table
23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Holidays can be set for and assigned to trunks and Unified Messaging ports. When a call is received from a certain trunk or by a certain subscriber during the time frame set for an assigned holiday, the call handling settings for that holiday will be used.
Page 817 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Feature Guide References 3.2.1.20 Holiday Service Start Time Specifies the time of day on the specified date at which to begin the holiday service. Click the cell to display an array of hours and minutes. Select an hour of the day and a minute of the hour to set the time. Value Range Hour and Minute Feature Guide References...
Page 818 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Value Range No, Yes Feature Guide References 3.2.1.20 Holiday Service Company Greeting No. Specify the greeting callers hear when calling the affected trunks or ports during the holiday. Value Range None (do not playback): No greeting is heard. No.
Page 819 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Trunk Affected Specify which trunks will be subject to the holiday setting. Click Edit, and then select the check boxes for the trunks to be subject to the holiday setting, or select the All check box to apply the holiday to all trunks. Click OK to finish.
Page 820 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table PC Programming Manual...
Page 821: Um Configuration-[5] System Parameters
Section 24 UM Configuration—[5] System Parameters This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Parameters menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 822: Um Configuration-[5-1] System Parameters-Mailbox Group
24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group Also called System Group Distribution Lists. Mailbox Groups allow a caller or subscriber to record a message and have it sent to several mailboxes. Messages sent to a Mailbox Group are sent to all subscribers in the group.
Page 823 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group Select the desired WAV file. Click Open to import the file. Click OK. Group List No. Specifies the Mailbox Group number. This number is similar to a mailbox number and is used to send a message to all subscribers of the group.
Page 824: Um Configuration-[5-2] System Parameters-Extension Group
24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group An Extension Group is a group of extensions that share a common mailbox. Each group has an Extension Group number. If the group number is assigned as the owner of a mailbox, then all members cannot be assigned their own personal mailboxes.
Page 825 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group Group Name Specifies the group name. Value Range Max. 32 characters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.18 Extension Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 826: Um Configuration-[5-3] System Parameters-System Caller Name Announcement
24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement Allows the System Administrator to store a maximum of 200 telephone numbers and record a caller name for each telephone number. The caller name is announced when playing a message in their mailbox from one of the pre-programmed callers, when the system transfers a call to the subscriber from one of the pre-programmed callers (Caller ID Screening), and when the system pages the subscriber by intercom (Intercom Paging).
Page 827 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement Click Open to import the file. Click OK. Caller-ID No. Assigns the telephone number for which the system announces the pre-recorded caller name to extension users. Value Range Max. 20 digits consisting of 0–9 Feature Guide References 3.2.1.10 Caller Name Announcement Description...
Page 828: Um Configuration-[5-4] System Parameters-Parameters
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Daily Hours Setting Clock Format Specifies the time format (12-hour or 24-hour). Note The selected time format (12-hour or 24-hour) affects the time format of reports as well as the time that appears in e-mail notifications for new messages.
Page 829 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Prompt Setting These settings are required when Multilingual Service is enabled. Primary Language Specifies the default language to be used when another language is not selected in the Multilingual Selection Menu. Value Range Guidance No. 1–8 Feature Guide References 3.2.1.31 Multilingual Service 3.2.1.41 System Prompts...
Page 830 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Language 1–5—DTMF Specifies the number to be input to select the language set for the current language selection number. Value Range None, 1–9 Feature Guide References 3.2.1.31 Multilingual Service 3.2.1.41 System Prompts Selection Menu Wait Time (0-20 s) Specifies the length of time that the system waits for the caller to select a language by pressing the appropriate dial key.
Page 831 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Value Range 0–10 s Feature Guide References 3.2.1.41 System Prompts System Guidance—System Guidance Specifies the parameters which vary depending on the language assigned as the System Guidance language. For each selection of this setting, related items within "System Guidance 1–8" can be set. Value Range Guidance No.
Page 832 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Value Range POUND, HASH PBX Parameters Specifies how the system will initiate and control call transfers, setup outgoing calls, and control message waiting lamps on extensions. PBX Environment—Operator Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]) Specifies the sequence for transferring calls to an operator’s extension.
Page 833 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters , : Dial Pause (default 1 s) ; : Dial Pause (default 3 s) X: Extension Dialling 0–9, , #: Dial Code Feature Guide References 3.2.1.1 Alternate Extension Group Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification Dialling Parameters—Call Transfer No Answer Time (10-60 s) Specifies the length of time that the system waits before retrieving the transferred call when there is no answer at the destination extension.
Page 834 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Message Waiting Notification—System Callback No. (Up to 32 digits) Specifies a callback number to be displayed with text reports of messages waiting notifications. The system callback number is displayed when the caller does not enter his or her telephone number when prompted by the system.
Page 835 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Outgoing Call UM Extensions Specifies the Unified Messaging extensions for the External Message Delivery feature. Value Range UM port extension number PC Programming Manual References 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property Feature Guide References 3.2.2.12 External Message Delivery Service Message Length (1-6 min) Specifies the maximum length (in minutes) of messages recorded for the External Delivery Message.
Page 836 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Company Telephone No. (Up to 32 digits) Specifies the company’s telephone number. When the recipient has failed to retrieve the sender’s message because of he or she did not enter the correct password, the system announces the company’s telephone number to the caller.
Page 837 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PC Programming Manual References 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting— Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting— Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Feature Guide References 3.2.1.23 Intercom Paging Caller Recorded Name Announce Mode Determines whether or not the system announces the caller’s name during paging.
Page 838 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Fax No Answer Time (5-60s) Specifies the length of time (in seconds) that the system waits for the main or alternate fax extension to answer a fax call before taking other action, such as notifying the Fax Manager that the fax could not be received. Value Range 5–60 s Fax Manager Mailbox No.
Page 839 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maximum Continuous Tone Time (0-60 s) Specifies the length of time the system waits when a continuous tone is detected before it disconnects the call. Value Range 0–60 s Maximum Cyclic Tone Time (0-60 s) Specifies the length of time the system waits when a cyclic tone is detected before it disconnects the call.
Page 840 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Outside Transfer Sequence—EFA Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N A]) Specifies the sequence the system uses to transfer calls to trunks using EFA (External Feature Access). This setting should match the settings of the PBX.
Page 841 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Outside Transfer Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside Answer Mode Specifies the answering method the system uses to detect whether the destination party has answered the transferred trunk call. Value Range Guidance: The system plays the following guidance before connecting the line to the destination party: "You have a call.
Page 842 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Value Range Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes D: Disconnecting F: Flash (Recall) R: Ringback Tone Detection T: Dial Tone Detection , : Dial Pause for 1 s (default) ; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default) 0–9, , #: Dial Code Number of Digits in Telephone Number (1-20)
Page 843 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Value Range Unlimited, Other Feature Guide References 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device Maximum Message Length (Other) (1-30 min) Specifies the maximum length of voice messages sent as e-mail attachments. Note If you attach a voice message that is longer than this setting, surplus parts of the message may be discarded when sending the e-mail.
Page 844 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PC Programming Manual...
Page 845: Um Configuration-[6] H/W Settings
Section 25 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the H/W Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 846: Um Configuration-[6] H/W Settings
25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings 25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings Global Parameters Global parameters define the settings that affect integration with other PBX operations. Maximum Time to Wait for Dial Tone (500-20000 ms, *100 ms) Specifies the length of time that the system waits for dial tone detection. Value Range 5–200 (´...
Page 847: Um Configuration-[7] System Security
Section 26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Security menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 848: Um Configuration-[7] System Security
26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Manager Login Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times) Specifies the number of times an invalid password can be entered, when the System Manager or Message Manager tries to log in to the system using a telephone, before the call is disconnected. Value Range 1–99 times System Manager Access from Telephone...
Page 849 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 3.1.2.7 System Security Password for Message Manager (Up to 16 numeric digits) If "Enable" is selected in Message Manager Access from Telephone, assign a numerical password here for the Message Manager to login to the system. Value Range Max.
Page 850 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Login Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times) Specifies the number of times an invalid password can be entered before the system disconnects the call. In order to use this feature, Enable Login Failure Disconnection must be set to "Enable". Value Range 1–99 times Default Password for New Mailboxes...
Page 851: Network Service
Section 27 Network Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Network Service menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 852: Network Service-[1] Ip Address/Ports
27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Basic Settings LAN Setting—DHCP Port Number Specifies the port number of the DHCP client. This parameter is only available for entering values when Obtain an IP address automatically is selected. Value Range 68, 1024–65535 LAN Setting—Obtain an IP address automatically/Use the following IP address...
Page 853 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Value Range 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254 DNS Setting—Port Number Specifies the port number of the DNS server. This parameter is only available for entering values when Obtain DNS server address automatically is selected. Value Range 53, 1024–65535 DNS Setting—Obtain DNS server address automatically/Use the following DNS server address Specifies whether to enable the DHCP server to assign DNS server address information automatically to the mother board, or to enter the information manually.
Page 854: Advanced Settings
27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports DSP IP Setting—DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—IP Address Specifies the IP address of the DSP card. This parameter is only available for entering values when Use the following DSP IP address is selected. Value Range 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254 DSP IP Setting—DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the DSP card (reference only).
Page 855 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Assigned IP Address—Default Gateway Indicates the assigned IP address of the default gateway for the network (reference only). DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—IP Address Indicates the IP address assigned for an installed optional DSP card (reference only). DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the DSP card (reference only).
Page 856: Network Service-[2] Server Feature
27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP 27.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP Settings for the DHCP Server can be programmed. DHCP Server DHCP Server Specifies if the DHCP server functions of the PBX are enabled or not. Value Range Disable, Enable Port number...
Page 857 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP IP Address Static Assignment MAC Address Specifies the MAC addresses of the MAC address/IP address pairs to be subject to static DHCP allocation. Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF IP Address Specifies the IP addresses of the MAC address/IP address pairs to be subject to static DHCP allocation. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 IP Address Assignment List...
Page 858: Network Service-[2-2] Server Feature-Ftp
27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP 27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP Settings for FTP server connections can be programmed. Connection Control—Control Port number Specifies the port number for connecting to the PBX’s FTP server. Value Range 21, 1024–65535 Data Transfer Port—Port number (Minimum) Specifies the minimum port number for FTP data transfer.
Page 859: Network Service-[2-4] Server Feature-Http
27.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP 27.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP HTTP server settings can be programmed. HTTP (LAN)—Port number Specifies the port number for HTTP connections using the LAN ports. This port is used for accessing the PBX for Web Maintenance Console programming. Value Range 80, 1024–65535 HTTP (LAN)—HTTPs server...
Page 860: Network Service-[2-5] Server Feature-Ntp
27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP 27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP NTP server settings for use with KX-UT series SIP phones can be programmed. NTP server Enables or disables NTP service with the PBX’s NTP server for connected KX-UT series SIP phones. When this feature is enabled, the PBX will report to connected KX-UT series SIP phones the information obtained from the SNTP server specified in 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date &...
Page 861: Network Service-[2-6] Server Feature-Smtp
27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Settings for SMTP for sending e-mail for PBX functions can be programmed. Mail sending—Mail sender information name Specifies the name to be used as the sender of the e-mails from the PBX. Value Range Max.
Page 862 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP SMTP Authentication—SMTP Authentication Specifies whether authentication on the SMTP server is enabled. Value Range Enable, Disable SMTP Authentication—User Name Specifies the user name required to access the SMTP server. Value Range Max. 64 characters SMTP Authentication—Password Specifies the password required to access the SMTP server.
Page 863 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Value Range Max. 64 characters POP Before SMTP—Password Specifies the password for the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled. Value Range Max. 64 characters Mail Receiving—SMTP Authentication Specifies if SMTP authentication is enabled for mail receiving. Value Range Enable, Disable Mail Receiving—SMTP over TLS...
Page 864: Network Service-[2-7] Server Feature-Imap4
27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 Settings for IMAP4 server functions for the PBX can be programmed. IMAP4—IMAP4 server Specifies whether to enable the IMAP4 server functions of the PBX. Value Range Enable, Disable IMAP4—Port number Specifies a port number for the IMAP server.
Page 865: Network Service-[3] Client Feature
27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP 27.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature 27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP FTP client connection settings can be programmed. Up to 5 FTP sites can be specified for connections. Connection 1—Connection 5 Connection Name Specifies the name of the connection to use for programming in other items. Value Range Max.
Page 866 27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP Value Range Max. 24 characters (A–Z, a–z, 0–9, =, [hyphen], [underscore]) Note The first character must be a letter, number, or =. Protocol Specifies the communication protocol for the FTP connection. Value Range FTP, FTPS (Explicit), FTPS (Implicit) PC Programming Manual...
Page 867: Network Service-[3-2] Client Feature-Syslog
27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog 27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog Settings can be programmed for a Syslog client connection. Remote Syslog Specifies whether an external Syslog server will be used with the PBX. Value Range Enable, Disable Remote Syslog server—IP address / Host name Specifies the IP address or host name of the external Syslog server.
Page 868: Network Service-[3-3] Client Feature-Snmp Agent
27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent Using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), it is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP manager to manage and receive PBX system status information, such as alarm information and general system activity. The related PBX system settings can be programmed.
Page 869 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent MIB info—SysName Specifies the administrative name for the system. Value Range Max. 255 characters Feature Guide References 5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor MIB info—SysLocation Specifies the physical location for the system. Value Range Max.
Page 870 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent Trap port Specifies a port number used to send trap messages from the agent to an SNMP manager. Value Range 162, 1024–65535 Feature Guide References 5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor Community name Specifies a community name of an SNMP manager.
Page 871 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent Feature Guide References 5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor PC Programming Manual...
Page 872: Network Service-[4] Other
27.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security 27.4 Network Service—[4] Other 27.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security Network security settings can be programmed. ICMP Echo Reply—LAN Port Specifies if the LAN port will send ICMP echo-replies to incoming ICMP echo-requests. Value Range Enable, Disable ICMP Echo Reply—Log Output Specifies if the PBX logs ICMP echo-replies.
Page 873: Network Service-[4-2] Other-Nas
27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS 27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS NAS settings can be programmed. NAS Status Displays/changes the connection status of the NAS. Value Range Connected, Disconnected To change the connection status of the NAS, perform the following: • Click Disconnect to set the NAS to disconnect status. •...
Page 874 27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS CIFS Setting—User Name Specifies the NAS connection user name when NAS Setting—Protocol is set to CIFS. Value Range Max. 24 characters (multi-byte characters allowed) CIFS Setting—Password Specifies the NAS connection password when NAS Setting—Protocol is set to CIFS. Value Range Max.
Page 875: Appendix
Section 28 Appendix PC Programming Manual...
Page 876: Revision History
28.1.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx 28.1 Revision History 28.1.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx New Contents • 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration • 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group • 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group • 7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—TCP Trace •...
Page 877 28.1.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx Changed Contents • Introduction • 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console • 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode • 2.1.2 Access Levels • 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • 3.1 Home Screen • 4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information •...
Page 878: Pfmpr Software File Version 004.2Xxxx
28.1.2 PFMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2 • 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button • 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console • 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission • 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL •...
Page 879: Feature Programming References
Feature Programming References PC Programming Manual...
Page 880 Feature Programming References KX-UT Series SIP Phones • 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-UTEXT • 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT • 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 5.2.2.1 KX-UT Series SIP Phones Absent Message • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Absent Message Set / Cancel •...
Page 881: Tool-Bri Automatic Configuration
Feature Programming References – Dial—Extension Inter-digit (s) – Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset (s) – Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free (s) Feature Guide References 2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release Automatic Fax Transfer • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— DISA—Intercept Timer—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s) •...
Page 882 Feature Programming References • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features – External BGM On / Off – BGM Set / Cancel • 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH – Internal MOH—MOH1-2 (Music On Hold 1-2) • 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager Feature Guide References 2.30.1 Background Music (BGM) Budget Management...
Page 883 Feature Programming References • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in Communication Assistant Feature Guide References 2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant) Call Billing for Guest Room • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension • 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge— Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone"...
Page 884 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) • 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY •...
Page 885 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Call Hold • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone – Recall—Hold Recall (s) – Recall—Disconnect after Recall (x60s) • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features –...
Page 886 Feature Programming References – Type – Parameter Selection (for Call Park) – Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park) Feature Guide References 2.13.2 Call Park Call Pickup • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features – Group Call Pickup –...
Page 887 Feature Programming References Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG • 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—...
Page 888 Feature Programming References Caller ID • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous – Caller ID—Waiting to receive (s) – Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display (s) • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4— Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller ID Digits •...
Page 889 Feature Programming References – CLIR Set / Cancel – Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4 – Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of Held Party) – Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO –...
Page 890 Feature Programming References • 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission – Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter – Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Timer • 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—Maintenance –...
Page 891 Feature Programming References Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG • 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—...
Page 892 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.15.1 Conference Group Call Confirmation Tone • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3 – Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice – Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer – Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from DOORPHONE –...
Page 893 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection Direct In Line (DIL) • 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL – DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night – Tenant Number – UM Service Group No. –...
Page 894 Feature Programming References • 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Direct SIP Connection • 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site • 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW • 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW Feature Guide References 4.1.1.2 Direct SIP Connection Display Information...
Page 895 Feature Programming References • 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND • 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) Door Open • 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE Card •...
Page 896 Feature Programming References • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters— E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address • 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Feature Guide References 5.4.1 E-mail Notification for Extension Users E-mail Notification for Manager • 7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report •...
Page 897 Feature Programming References • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive – Executive Busy Override – Executive Busy Override Deny • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—One-touch Busy Override by SCO key • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny •...
Page 898 Feature Programming References • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— External Feature Access • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation • 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation •...
Page 899 Feature Programming References • 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy • 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button • 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.21.2 Flexible Buttons Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main –...
Page 900 Feature Programming References – Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal)) • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND • 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button – Type – Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both)) – Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External)) –...
Page 901 Feature Programming References 2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback Hands-free Operation • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free (s) • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— Answer Mode Feature Guide References 2.11.1 Hands-free Operation Headset Operation •...
Page 902 Feature Programming References – Overflow No Answer – Miscellaneous • 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List • 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features Incoming Call Log • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 7 –...
Page 903 Feature Programming References Intercept Routing • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s) • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Intercept Timer—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s) •...
Page 904: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Cs Status Monitor-Air Sync Group
Feature Programming References 2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block Internal Call Features • 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone— Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References 2.1.2 Internal Call Features IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) • 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main— IP Terminal Registration Mode •...
Page 905 Feature Programming References • 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button – Type – Dial (for ISDN Service) Feature Guide References 4.1.2.11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN) • 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan—...
Page 906 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 5.3 Legacy Device Connection Line Preference—Incoming • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— Incoming Preferred Line • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Incoming Preferred Line Feature Guide References 2.4.2 Line Preference—Incoming Line Preference—Outgoing •...
Page 907 Feature Programming References • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer • 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button – Type – Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) – Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out) • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer •...
Page 908: Pbx Configuration-[10-4] Co & Incoming Call-Msn Table
Feature Programming References 2.20.1 Message Waiting Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service • 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN – Distribution Method – DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit – DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial • 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO &...
Page 909 Feature Programming References Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) • 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature – BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override – BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2 • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant— OHCA / Whisper OHCA Feature Guide References...
Page 910 Feature Programming References • 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message (s) • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— OGM Record / Clear / Playback •...
Page 911 Panasonic SIP Phones (P-SIP) • 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT • 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT Feature Guide References 5.2.2.4 Panasonic SIP Phones (P-SIP) Pause Insertion • 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Pause Time • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—...
Page 912 Feature Programming References Ping • 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping Feature Guide References 5.6.7 PING Confirmation Portable Station (PS) Connection • 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Feature Guide References 5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection Power Failure Transfer Feature Guide References 5.6.2 Power Failure Transfer Printing Message •...
Page 913 Feature Programming References • 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List Feature Guide References 5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group PS Roaming by Network ICD Group • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer (s) • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4— System Wireless—Out of Range Registration Feature Guide References...
Page 914 Feature Programming References Quick Dialling • 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Feature Guide References 2.6.5 Quick Dialling Reverse Circuit • 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Reverse Detection Feature Guide References 2.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit Ring Tone Pattern Selection •...
Page 915 Feature Programming References – Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTP) Port No. – Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTPS) Port No. – Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address –...
Page 916 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension • 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT • 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Trunk •...
Page 917 Feature Programming References Speed Dialling—Personal/System • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features – System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling – Personal Speed Dialling - Programming • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level for System Speed Dialling • 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial •...
Page 918 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.22.1.2 Syslog Record Management Tenant Service • 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM – PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night – BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold • 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table • 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table •...
Page 919 Feature Programming References • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4— Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering • 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— •...
Page 920 Feature Programming References • 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) • 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main— Timed Reminder Message for SIP-MLT / Standard SIP Phone—Message • 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR— Print Information—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) Feature Guide References...
Page 921 Feature Programming References • 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting— ARS Mode • 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings— CO Name Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Trunk Adaptor Connection • 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW – Trunk Adaptor –...
Page 922 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation Unified Messaging—Alternate Extension Group • 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters— Alternate Extension Feature Guide References 3.2.1.1 Alternate Extension Group Unified Messaging—Auto Forwarding • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/ Personal Custom Serv –...
Page 923 Feature Programming References Unified Messaging—Automatic Login • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service – Auto Login Extension – Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement – Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2 – Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement –...
Page 924 Feature Programming References Unified Messaging—Call Transfer to Outside • 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer— Call Transfer to Outside • 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside Feature Guide References 3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to Outside Unified Messaging—Callback Number Entry •...
Page 925 Feature Programming References 3.2.2.5 Call-through Service Unified Messaging—Company Greeting • 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group – Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Selection) – Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Other) •...
Page 926 Feature Programming References 3.2.2.11 Direct Service Access Unified Messaging—Extension Group • 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group Feature Guide References 3.2.1.18 Extension Group Unified Messaging—External Message Delivery Service • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/ Personal Custom Serv –...
Page 927 Feature Programming References 3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode Unified Messaging—IMAP Integration • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— Mailbox Password (Message Client) • 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General – Desktop Messaging Feature Guide References 3.3.2 IMAP Integration Unified Messaging—Incomplete Call Handling Service •...
Page 928 Feature Programming References – LCS Recording Mode – LCS Answer Mode • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Recording Mode • 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox— Message Cancel for Live Call Screening Feature Guide References 3.2.2.16 Live Call Screening (LCS) Unified Messaging—Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox) •...
Page 929 Feature Programming References – E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order – E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title String – E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Callback Number – E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Send Wait Time [0-120 min] –...
Page 930 Feature Programming References Unified Messaging—On Hold Announcement Menu • 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation Feature Guide References 3.2.1.33 On Hold Announcement Menu Unified Messaging—Operator Service • 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing—23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters –...
Page 931 Feature Programming References Unified Messaging—Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting • 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox— Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting Feature Guide References 3.2.1.36 Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting Unified Messaging—Port Service • Section 22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service Feature Guide References 3.2.1.37 Port Service Unified Messaging—Remote Call Forwarding Set...
Page 932 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 3.1.2.7 System Security Unified Messaging—Toll Saver • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service – Auto Login Extension – Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement – Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2 –...
Page 933 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 3.2.2.30 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer Unified Messaging—Urgent Message • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters – Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages – E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages •...
Page 934 Feature Programming References Verification Code Entry • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock Counter • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings – Option 1— ARS Itemised Code –...
Page 935 Feature Programming References • 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4 – LCS Recording Mode – LCS Answer Mode • 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button – Type – Extension Number (for Two-way Record) –...
Page 936 Feature Programming References • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No. • 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button – Type – Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer) • 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console – Type – Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer) Feature Guide References 2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network...
Page 937 Feature Programming References – BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override – BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2 • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant— OHCA / Whisper OHCA • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5— Whisper OHCA—for SLT Feature Guide References 2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA...
Page 938 This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2014...

Panasonic kx-ns500 Pc Programming Manual

1 Overview

2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console

3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen

4 Status

5 System Control

6 Tool

7 Utility

8 Users

9 PBX Configuration-[1] Configuration

10 PBX Configuration-[2] System

11 PBX Configuration-[3] Group

12 PBX Configuration-[4] Extension

Quick Links

Related Manuals for Panasonic kx-ns500

Summary of Contents for Panasonic kx-ns500